Yokogawa MW100, MX110 -UNV-H04, -UNV-M10, -V4R-M06, MX112 -B12-M04, -B35-M04, MX115 -D05-H10, -D24-H10, MX120 -VAO-M08, -PWM-M08, MX125 -MKC-M10, MX150 -6 User's Manual
Below you will find brief information for Data Acquisition Unit MW100, Universal Input Module MX110-UNV-H04, Universal Input Module MX110-UNV-M10, Universal Input Module MX110-V4R-M06, Strain Input Module MX112-B12-M04, Strain Input Module MX112-B35-M04, Digital Input Module MX115-D05-H10, Digital Input Module MX115-D24-H10, Analog Output Module MX120-VAO-M08, Analog Output Module MX120-PWM-M08, Digital Output Module MX125-MKC-M10, Base Plate MX150-6. The MW100 Data Acquisition Unit is a powerful tool for acquiring data from various sensors and devices, processing it with built-in math functions, and outputting the results. It includes a variety of input/output modules that can be connected to different types of sensors and devices to meet specific application needs.
Advertisement
Advertisement
User’s
Manual MW100
Data Acquisition Unit
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
IM MW100-01E
1st Edition
Foreword
Notes
Trademarks
Revisions
Thank you for purchasing the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit. This user’s manual contains useful information about the instrument’s functions, installation and wiring procedures, operating procedures, and handling precautions. To ensure correct use, please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation. The five manuals below are also provided in addition to this manual. Read them along with this manual. As with this manual, the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual (IM MW180-01E) and the MW100
Communication Command Manual (IM MW180-01E) are included in the accompanying
CD-ROM.
Manual Title
MW100 Data Acquisition
Unit Operation Guide
Manual No.
Description
IM MW100-02E Describes concisely the handling of the
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit and the basic operations of the MW100 Viewer Software.
IM MX100-71E Summarizes the precautions regarding the use of the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.
Precautions on the Use of the MX100/MW100
Data Acquisition Unit
MX100/MW100 Data Acquisition IM MX100-72E Describes concisely the installation procedures
Unit Installation and and wiring procedures of the MW100 Data
Connection Guide Acquisition Unit.
MW100 Viewer Software
User’s Manual
IM MW180-01E Describes the functions and operations of the
MW100 Viewer Software that comes standard with the MW100 main module.
MW100 Communication
Command Manual
IM MW100-17E Describes the communication command of the
MW100 main module.
This manual describes the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit, style number “S2.” Check the style number on the name plate of the main module (see page iv for the location of the name plate).
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument’s performance and functions.
• Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative, dealer, or sales office.
• Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is strictly prohibited.
• The TCP/IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP/IP software have been developed/created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD
Networking Software, Release 1 that has been licensed from the University of
California at Berkeley.
• Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems incorporated.
• Java and logomark are are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Sun Microsystems Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
• CompactFlash is a registered trademark of Sundisk Corporation in the USA, and licensed from the CFA (Compact Flash Association).
• For purposes of this manual, the and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names
• Company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
1st Edition: June, 2005
1st Edition : June 2005 (YK)
All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2005 Yokogawa Electric Corporation
IM MW100-01E i
ii
Safety Precautions
About This Manual
• Please pass this manual to the end user.
• Read this manual thoroughly and have a clear understanding of the product before operation.
• This manual explains the functions of the product. It does not guarantee that the product will suit a particular purpose of the user.
• Under absolutely no circumstances may the contents of this manual be transcribed or copied, in part or in whole, without permission.
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
• Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents.
However, should you have any questions or find any errors or omissions, please contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer.
Precautions Related to the Protection, Safety, and Alteration of the Product
• The following safety symbols are used on the product and in this manual.
Danger. Refer to the user’s manual.This symbol appears on dangerous locations on the instrument which require special instructions for proper handling or use. The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the manual to identify those instructions.)
Functional ground terminal (do not use this terminal as a protective ground terminal.)
Protective grounding terminal
Alternating current
• For the protection and safe use of the product and the system controlled by it, be sure to follow the instructions and precautions on safety that are stated in this manual whenever you handle the product. Take special note that if you handle the product in a manner that violates these instructions, the protection functionality of the product may be damaged or impaired. In such cases, YOKOGAWA does not guarantee the quality, performance, function, and safety of product.
• When installing protection and/or safety circuits such as lightning protection devices and equipment for the product and control system or designing or installing separate protection and/or safety circuits for fool-proof design and fail-safe design of the processes and lines that use the product and the control system, the user should implement these using additional devices and equipment.
• If you are replacing parts or consumable items of the product, make sure to use parts specified by
YOKOGAWA.
• This product is not designed or manufactured to be used in critical applications that directly affect or threaten human lives. Such applications include nuclear power equipment, devices using radioactivity, railway facilities, aviation equipment, air navigation facilities, aviation facilities, and medical equipment. If so used, it is the user’s responsibility to include in the system additional equipment and devices that ensure personnel safety.
• Do not modify this product.
IM MW100-01E
Safety Precautions
Warn WARNING
Use the Correct Power Supply
Ensure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power.
Connect the Protective Grounding Terminal
Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power.
Do Not Impair the Protective Grounding
Never cut off the internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective earth terminal. Doing so invalidates the protective functions of the instrument and poses a potential shock hazard.
Do Not Operate with Defective Protective Grounding or Fuse
Do not operate the instrument if the protective earth or fuse might be defective. Make sure to check them before operation.
Do Not Use in the Presence of Flammable Liquids, Vapors, and Dust
Do not use the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids, vapors, and dust. Operation in such environments constitutes a safety hazard.
Do Not Remove Covers
The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWA’s qualified personnel only. Opening the cover is dangerous, because some areas inside the instrument have high voltages.
Ground the Instrument before Making External Connections
Connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or to an external control unit.
Avoid Damage to the Protective Structure
Operating the instrument in a manner not described in this manual may damage its protective structure.
Exemption from Responsibility
• YOKOGAWA makes no warranties regarding the product except those stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately.
• YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect, caused by the user or any unpredictable defect of the product.
Handling Precautions of the Software
• YOKOGAWA makes no warranties regarding the software accompanying this product except those stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately.
• Use the software on a single PC.
• You must purchase another copy of the software if you are to use the software on another PC.
• Copying the software for any purposes other than backup is strictly prohibited.
• Please store the original media containing the software in a safe place.
• Reverse engineering, such as decompiling of the software, is strictly prohibited.
• No portion of the software supplied by YOKOGAWA may be transferred, exchanged, sublet, or leased for use by any third party without prior permission by YOKOGAWA.
IM MW100-01E
iii
Checking the Contents of the Package
Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument. If some of the contents are not correct, or if any items are missing or damaged, contact the dealer from whom you purchased them.
Checking the Model and Suffix Code
Check the model and suffix code on the name plate indicated in the figure below.
Main module Input/Output module
Style number
MODEL
STYLE
SUFFIX
NO.
MODEL
STYLE
SUFFIX
NO.
Model
Style number
Suffix code
Instrument number
Instrument number
MAC address
Suffix code
Model
Base plate
Instrument number
Model
Note
When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument, please give them the
NO. (instrument number) on the name plate.
Main Module iv
Model
MW100
Manual language
Supply voltage
Suffix Code
-E
-1
-2
-3
Description
Main module
English (comes with an English manual)
1
100 VAC-240 VAC
12 VDC-28VDC, with AC adapter
2
12 VDC-28VDC, without AC adapter
3
3
4
1
2
5
6
Power supply and power cord -D
-F
-R
-Q
-H
-W
AC power: 3-pin inlet, UL/CSA Standard power cord
DC power: Screw terminal, UL/CSA cable for AC adapter
AC power: 3-pin inlet, VDE Standard power cord
DC power: Screw terminal, VDE cable for AC adapter
AC power: 3-pin inlet, SAA Standard power cord
DC power: Screw terminal, SAA cable for AC adapter
AC power: 3-pin inlet, BS Standard power cord
DC power: Screw terminal, BS cable for AC adapter
AC power: 3-pin inlet, GB (CCC) Standard power cord
DC power: Screw terminal, GB (CCC) cable for AC adapter
Screw terminal, power supply cord not included
2, 3
RS-232 communications interface
4, 5
RS-422A/485 communications interface
4, 5
MATH function
5, 6
Options /C2
/C3
/M1
Displays Celsius or Fahrenheit, Daylight savig time can be set.
“W” cannot be selected with “-2.”
“-3” can only be selected with “W”
“/C2” and “/C3” may not be selected together.
“/C2” or “/C3” must be selected to use the Modbus/RTU slave function. Also, “/M1” must be selected for use of the
Modbus/RTU master function.
“/M1” must be selected to use the Modbus/TCP client function.
IM MW100-01E
Checking the Contents of the Package
Universal Input Module
Model
MX110
Input type
Number of channels and measurement interval
Suffix Code
-UNV
-V4R
-H04
-M06*
-M10
Option Code Description
MX100/MW100 universal input module
For DCV/TC/DI/3-wire RTD input
For DCV/DI/4-wire RTD/4-wire resistance input
4-CH, high-speed measurement (minimum measurement
Interval: 10 ms)
6-CH, medium-speed measurement (minimum measurement interval: 100 ms)
10-CH, medium-speed measurement (minimum measurement interval: 100 ms)
Options /NC** Without the clamp terminal plate
* “-M06” must be selected if “-V4R” is selected. Also, “-M06” cannot be selected if “-UNV” is selected.
** The “/NC” option can be specified only when “-M10” is specified.
Strain Input Module
Suffix Code Model
MX112
Input type -B12
-B35
-NDI
Number of channels and measurement interval
-M04
Option Code Description
MX100/MW100 strain input module
Internal bridge resistance: 120
Ω
Internal bridge resistance: 350 Ω
NDIS connector for connections to an external bridge head
4-CH, medium-speed measurement (minimum measurement and measurement interval: 100 ms)
Digital Input Module
Suffix Code Model
MX115
Input type -D05
-D24
Number of channels and measurement interval
Options
-H10
Analog Output Module
Model
MX120
Output type
Suffix Code
Number of channels and output update interval
-VAO
-PWM
-M08
Option Code
/NC
Description
MX100/MW100 digital input module
Non-voltage contact, 5-V logic, open collector input
24 V logic
10-CH, high-speed measurement (minimum measurement and measurement interval: 10 ms)
Without the plate with the clamp terminals
Description
MX100/MW100 analog output module
Voltage/current output
Pulse width modulation output
8-CH, minimum output update interval: 100 ms
Digital Output Module
Model
MX125
Suffix Code
Output type
Number of channels and output update interval
-MKC
-M10
Base Plate
Model
MX150
Base type
Suffix Code
-1 to -6
Description
MX100/MW100 digital output module
A contact output
10-CH, minimum output update interval: 100 ms
Description
MX100/MW100 base plate (includes two brackets for DIN rail mount)
The value of the suffix code corresponds to the maximum number of input/ output modules that can be installed.
MX150-6 is for one main module, and six input/output modules.
IM MW100-01E
v
Checking the Contents of the Package
Standard Accessories
The following standard accessories are supplied with the main module. Check that all contents are present and that they are undamaged.
Power Cord (one of the following power cords is supplied according to the instrument’s suffix codes)
UL/CSA Standard
A1006WD
VDE Standard
A1009WD
SAA Standard
A1024WD
BS Standard
A1054WD
GB Standard (complies with CCC)
A1064WD
D F R
Q
H
Note: Not included when screw terminals are specified for the power section (Suffix code: W).
AC adapter and Power cord*
Model: 772075
* Power Cord for AC adapter(one of the following power cords is supplied according to the instrument’s suffix codes)
UL/CSA Standard VDE Standard SAA Standard BS Standard
GB Standard (complies with CCC)
D
F
R
Q
H
Note: Not included when screw terminals are specified for the power section (Suffix code: W).
MW100 Viewer Software
Model: MW180
MW100 Manual CD-ROM**
Part number: B8724XA
** Contains this manual (IM MW100-01E), the MW100
Viewer Software User’s Manual (IM MW180-01E) and MW100 Communication comand Manual (IM
MW100-17E).
Paper Manuals
• MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Operation Guide (IM MW100-02E)
• Precautions on the Use of the MX100/MW100 Data Acquisition Unit (IM MX100-71E)
• MX100/MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Installation and Connection Guide (IM MX100-72E)
Bracket for base plate
Part number: B8724EF
Screw for bracket
Part number: B9988DL
vi
IM MW100-01E
Checking the Contents of the Package
Optional Accessories (Sold Separately)
AC adapter
No. Name
1 AC adapter
Power supply code
Model Basic Suffix Minimum Note
Code Q’ty
772075
-D
-F
-R
-Q
-H
1
1
1
1
1
Cable for UL/CSA
Cable for VDE
Cable for SAA
Cable for BS
Cable for GB(CCC)
Terminals
No. Name
2 10-CH screw terminal block (with RJC)
Model
772061
3 772062-050 1
4
Connection cable between the input module and screw terminal block
Connection cable between the input module and screw terminal block
Minimum Q’ty Note
1 Dedicated to the MX110-UNV-M10/
MX115-D05-H10/MX115-D24-H10
772062-100 1
Cable length: 50 cm*
Cable length: 100cm*
5
6
7
8
9
Plate with clamp terminals (with RJC)
Screw terminal plate
Clamp terminal
Clamp terminal
Connector cover
772063
772080
772064
772065
772066
1
1
1
1
1
Dedicated to the MX110-UNV-M10/
MX115-D05-H10/MX115-D24-H10
Dedicated to the MX110-UNV-M10/
MX115-D05-H10/MX115-D24-H10
Dedicated to the MX110-UNV-H04
Dedicated to the MX120-VAO-M08/
MX120-PWM-M08/MX125-MKC-M10
For empty slots with no module installed
10 Plate with clamp terminals 772067 1 Dedicated to the MX110-V4R-M06
11 Plate with clamp terminals 772068
(Built in bridge: 120
Ω
)
1 Dedicated to the MX112-B12-M04
**
12 Plate with clamp terminals 772069
(Built in bridge: 350 Ω )
1 Dedicated to the MX112-B35-M04
* 772062 is only applicable between the MX110-UNV-M10 and the screw terminal (772061),
** the MX115-D05-H10 and the screw terminal (772061), and the MX115-D24-H10 and the screw terminal (772061).
** 772068 is only applicable to MX112-B35-M04. 772069 is only applicable to MX112-B12-
M04.
2 3, 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12
IM MW100-01E
vii
Checking the Contents of the Package
Shunt resistor
No. Name
13 Shunt resistor
(for the clamp terminal)
14 Shunt resistor
(for the clamp terminal)
15 Shunt resistor
16 Shunt resistor
17 Shunt resistor
18 Shunt resistor
Model
438920
438921
438922
415920
415921
415922
1
1
1
1
Minimum Q’ty Note
1 Resistance: 250
Ω±
0.1%
1 Resistance: 100 Ω± 0.1%
Resistance: 10 Ω± 0.1%
Resistance: 250 Ω± 0.1%
Resistance: 100 Ω± 0.1%
Resistance: 10 Ω± 0.1%
Memory card
No. Name
19 Adapter for
CompactFlash card
Model
772090
20 CompactFlash card
21 CompactFlash card
22 CompactFlash card
23 CompactFlash card
772091
772092
772093
772094
* Operating temperature range: -40 to 85 ° C
1
1
1
1
Minimum Q’ty Note
1
128MB*
256MB*
512MB*
1GB*
viii
IM MW100-01E
Conventions Used in This Manual
Unit
k
K
M
G
Denotes 1000.
Denotes 1024. Examlple: 5 KB (file size)
Denotes 1024 K. Example: 5 MB
Denotes 1024 M. Example: 2 GB
Safety Markings
The following markings are used in this manual.
Refer to corresponding location on the instrument. This symbol appears on dangerous locations on the instrument which require special instructions for proper handling or use.
The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the manual to identify those instructions.
WARNING
Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious injury or death to the user, and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.
CAUTION
Note
Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user or damage to the instrument or user’s data, and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.
Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument.
ix
IM MW100-01E
x
Contents
Chapter 1 Explanation of Functions
Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module ................................. 1-26
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
Contents
Functions of the 6-CH, Medium-Speed
Functions of the 8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog Output Module ..................................... 1-36
Functions of the 8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM Output Module ....................................... 1-37
Output Operation during an Abnormality and after Recovery from the Abnormality ...... 1-40
Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital Output Module .................................... 1-42
xi
Contents
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF ................. 2-17
Connections with the Power Cord (Power Supply/Cord Basic Specification Code -1M) ....... 2-17
Wiring the Power Supply Terminal (Power Supply/Cord Basic Specification Code -1W) ...... 2-18
Wiring the Power Supply Terminal (Power Supply/Cord Basic Specification -2M or -3W) ..... 2-19
xii
IM MW100-01E
Contents
Chapter 3 Setting and Data Acquisition
Setting Measurement Conditions (Measurement Channel Settings) ............................. 3-16
MATH Settings (MATH Channel Settings and the /M1 Option) ...................................... 3-18
IM MW100-01E
xiii
Contents
Starting and Stopping Measurement, Computation, and Recording .............................. 3-30
Checking the Operating Status of the MW100 Using the Status Indicators ................... 3-31
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
xiv
IM MW100-01E
Contents
Range Calibration for DC Voltage, RTD, Resistance, Strain, and Analog Output ......... 4-12
Calibration of Temperature Measurements using Thermocouples ................................. 4-16
Chapter 5 Specification
10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications ..................................... 5-29
6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Specifications ........... 5-33
8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog Output Module Specifications ........................................ 5-41
8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM Output Module Specifications ........................................... 5-43
Appendix
Index
IM MW100-01E
xv
Chapter 1 Explanation of Functions
1.1
System Overview
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit
The MW100 Data Acquisition Unit consists of a main module equipped with an Ethernet port, I/O modules for input and output of signals (these are the same as those for the
MX100 Data Acquisition Unit), and a base plate on which the first two items are mounted. The main module comes with a Web server function, allowing users to easily enter settings and monitor measured data from a PC using a browser. The MW100 can be used for data acquisition on site as a standalone, enabling data acquisition on up to
360 channels using the Modbus/TCP function.
System Configuration
The MW100 Data Acquisition Unit can be flexibly configured for a variety of measuring environments.
One-to-one Connection with a PC
This is an example of a system for small scale logging, setting the IP address, and other tasks.
PC
Using a Web browser:
• Easy setting entry
• Monitoring of measured data
Using PC software:
• IP address setting
• Calibration
Hub
MW100 Data Acauisition Unit
MW100
Ethernet port
1
Input/Output module
Main module
Standalone Configuration
This is an example of configuration for an on-site standalone data acquisition system.
PC
MW100 Data Acauisition Unit
MW100
CF card
1-1
IM MW100-01E
1.1 System Overview
One-to-N Connection with a PC
This is an example of a configuration suitable for relatively large scale data acquisition tasks. Connections can be made via Ethernet or RS-422A/485.
PC
Hub
MW100
MW100
MW100 Data Acauisition Unit
PC
MW100
MW100
MW100
MW100 Data Acauisition Unit
RS-422A/485
MW100
1-2
IM MW100-01E
1.1 System Overview
One-to-N Connection with the PC
This is an example in which multiple PCs are connected to the MW100 for performing data monitoring.
PC
PC
PC
1
Hub
MW100
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit
Connecting to Modbus Devices
This is an example of configuration of a system with connections to Modbus devices.
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit
(client)
MW100
Hub
IM MW100-01E
MW100 MW100
Modbus machine (server)
Modbus machine (server)
Note
Using the Web monitor or other communciation functions while using the Modbus function may affect the Modbus communication response.
1-3
1.1 System Overview
Main Module
The main module is equipped with power supply connectors, a power switch, Ethernet ports, and other devices facilitating supply of power to and control of the input/output modules, and connection to networks.
It also has Start and Stop keys, meaning that since data can be saved to a CF card, data can be acquired offline. Data acquisition via serial communication is also possible by adding the RS-232 or RS-422A/485 serial communication option.
1-4
Input/Output Modules
The following eleven types of modules are available. A screw terminal plate and separately installed screw terminal block (both sold separately) are available as accessories for the 10-CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module and the 10-CH High
Speed Digital Input Module.
4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module (MX110-UNV-H04)
• Minimum measurement interval: 10 ms (except 50 ms for temperature measurement
• Maximum number of inputs: 4 inputs
• Input types: DC voltage, TC, 3-wire RTD, and DI (LEVEL, contact)
10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module (MX110-UNV-M10)
• Minimum measurement interval: 100 ms
• Maximum number of inputs: 10 inputs
• Input types: DC voltage, TC, 3-wire RTD, and DI (LEVEL, contact)
6-CH, Medium-Speed, Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module (MX110-V4R-M06)
• Minimum measurement interval: 100 ms
• Maximum number of inputs: 6 inputs
• Input types: DC voltage, 4-wire RTD, 4-wire resistance, and DI (LEVEL, contact)
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
1.1 System Overview
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module (MX112-B12-M04 and MX112-B35-M04)
1
• Minimum measurement interval: 100 ms
• Maximum number of inputs: 4 inputs
• Input system: floating balanced input (isolation between channels)
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module (MX112-NDI-M04)
• Minimum measurement interval: 100 ms
• Maximum number of inputs: 4 inputs
• Input system: floating balanced input
(non-isolation between channels)
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module (MX115-D05-H10)
• Minimum measurement interval: 100 ms
• Maximum number of inputs: 10 inputs
• Input types: DI (non-voltage contact, open collector, 5-V logic)
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module (MX115-D24-H10)
• Minimum measurement interval: 10 ms
• Maximum number of inputs: 10 inputs
• Input types: DI (24-V logic)
1-5
1.1 System Overview
8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog Output Module (MX120-VAO-M08)
• Output update interval: 100 ms (shortest)
• Maximum number of inputs: 8 outputs
• Output type: DC voltage, DC current
8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM Output Module (MX120-PWM-M08)
• Output update interval: 100 ms (shortest)
• Maximum number of inputs: 8 outputs
• Output type: PWM
10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital Output Module (MX125-MKC-M10)
• Output update interval: 100 ms (shortest)
• Maximum number of outputs: 10 outputs
• Output type: A contact (SPST)
1-6
Base Plate
The base plate is equipped with connectors for connecting the main module and input/ output modules. There are six types of base plates available (connecting from one to six input/output modules ). By attaching DIN rail mounting brackets to the base plate, you can rack-mount or panel-mount the MW100 main unit.
Base plate
DIN rail mount bracket
DIN rail
IM MW100-01E
PC Software
1.1 System Overview
The MW100 Data Acquisition Unit comes with the MW100 Viewer software program that allows users to view measured data acquired by the MW100. MW100 Viewer consists of the three software components described below. For a detailed description of the functions of these software components, see the MW100 Viewer software user’s manual
(IM MW180-01E).
Address Setting Software
Sets the IP address on the MW100. This software is used when setting an IP address for the first time, or if the current IP address needs to be changed.
1
Viewer Software
Enables you to (1) display measured and computed data that has been stored, (2) read values and perform computation over an area using cursors, and (3) convert the measured and computed data into various file formats such as Excel.
Calibration Software
This software is used to calibrate the input/output modules connected to the MW100.
IM MW100-01E
1-7
1-8
1.2
MW100 Operation Guide
The figure below shows the general flow of operation when the MW100 is installed initially.
Operations on the MW100 Operations on the PC
Section 2.2 and 2.3
Instal the MW100 and attaching the main module
Section X.X indicates the referred sections in this manual.
Section 2.4
Wire the input/ output modules
Section 2.6 to 2.8
Connect to the network
See the Installation and
Connection Guide
(IM MX100-72E).
Section 2.5
Connect the power cord
Section 3.2
Connect to the
MW100
Search for all connected MW100s and configure network parameters such as
the MW100s’ IP addresses.
Section 3.3
Configure the system
MW100 system configuration, date setting, CF card setup
Section 3.4
Enter data acquisition conditions
Select the acquisition interval to be used, select the recording interval, set recording start/stop conditions, etc.
Section 3.5
Set measurement conditions
Input channel settings, input type, measuring range, measurement span, etc.
Section 3.6
MATH settings
MATH channel settings, entry of expressions, etc.
Section 3.8
Digital output settings
Alarm output, manual DO, Fail output, and error output settings
Section 3.7
Alarm settings
Alarm level and type settings
Section 3.9
Transmission output settings
Analog/PWM output settings
Section 3.10 and 3.11
Event settings
Event/action settings
Section 3.14
FTP and e-mail settings
Settings for the FTP server, mail server, and other network utilities
Section 3.13
Start and stop measurement, computation, and recording
Starting and stopping data measurement, computation, and recording
While online you can start and stop data measurement, computation, and recording from a PC
Section 3.16
Monitor data and alarms
Measured data and alarm display
settings while online
Display and check data
Display data using the Viewer software.
See the MW100 Viewer Software User’s
Manual (IM MW180-01E).
IM MW100-01E
1.3
Functions of the Main Module
The main module is the central component of the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.
Names and Functions of Parts
Ethernet port
Used for main unit settings and network connections
(see 2.6, “Connecting an
Ethernet Cable,” or 3.2,
“Connecting to the MW100.”)
Status indicator*
The operational status of the instrument is indicated by the illumination of the LED.
CF card slot
Insert the CF card to save data and perform other tasks
(see section 2.11, “Handling of the
CF Card,” or 3.3, “System Settings”).
Communication status LED
Check the communication status
Top: LINK LED
Illuminates orange when ready for communication
Bottom: ACT LED
Illuminates green when packets are sent/received
7-segment LED
Displays the operational status of the MW100 (see “Displays” in this section, or section 4.1, “7-Segment
LED Error Display”).
Start/Stop keys
Start and stop measurement, computation, and recording
(seesection 3.13, “Starting and
Stopping Measurement, Computation, and Recording”).
User function key
Assign functions to the keys
(see, “Switches and Keys” in this section)
MEASURE
RECORD
SERIAL RD
ALARM
MATH
ETHERNET
RS-422A/485 connector (/C3 option)
Depending on installed options, the connector may or may not be available, or it may be an RS-232 connector (/C2 option, see “Communication
Specifications” in this section)
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
SW
ON
START
10BASE - T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
POWER
STOP
FG SG SDB SDA RDB RDA
SERIAL COMM
Dip switch 1
Used to initialize settings, and for other purposes
(see, “Switches and
Keys” in this section)
Dip switch 2
Not used.
USER 1 USER 2
100 - 240V AC
TERMN
ON OFF
70VA MAX 50 / 60Hz
Power switch
Turns the power to the
MW100 main unit ON and OFF
Functional ground terminal
Power supply inlet
Connect the accessory power supply cord This is listed as a screw terminal in the power supply specifications.
Terminator switch (/C3 option)
Turns the terminator ON and OFF
IM MW100-01E
*Status indicators
Illuminate in the following situations
MEASURE
RECORD
SERIAL SD
ALARM
MATH
Alarm activation or alarm hold
Computing (illuminates), computing processing (blinking)
Receiving serial communications data
Recording (illuminates), recording processing (blinking)
Measuring
1-9
1
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Switches and Keys
The MW100 has the following switches and keys. Some are included with options.
• Start and Stop keys
• User function key 1
• User function key 2
• Dip switch 1
• Dip switch 2
• Terminator switch (/C3 option)
• Power switch
User Function Keys
Actions set up using the Event/Action function can be executed by pressing the user function keys on the front panel of the MW100.
The keys are assigned as follows by default.
Key
User function key 1
User function key 2
Display
USER1
USER2
Action
Write to setting values file
Load setting values file
Dip Switch 1
Used to initialize the MW100 settings and for other functions.
• Normal operation
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
• Initialization of IP addresses and other settings
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
• Fixed IP address (192.168.0.10)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Dip Switch 2
Turn all switches ON for normal operation. If the switches are set differently, the instrument may not function correctly.
1 2
Key Lock Function
You can apply a lock to the functions of the Start, Stop, and user function keys. The lock prevents inadvertent execution of functions.
Connectors
The MW100 can come with the following connectors. The actually-installed connectors depend on the power supply input section specifications and options.
• Ethernet
• RS-422A/485 connector (/C3 option)
• RS-232 connector (/C2 option)
• CF card slot
• Power supply inlet (power supply input section specification: -1M)
• Power supply screw terminals (power supply input section specification: -1W, -2M, -3W)
1-10
IM MW100-01E
Displays
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
The MW100 indicates its operating conditions with the following displays.
• 7-segment LED
• Status indicators
• Communication status LED
7-Segment LED
Displays the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit’s unit number, operation status, end of operation, and errors.
• Unit Number Display
Unit numbers can be set from 00 to 89. - is displayed.
• Display of the Self-Test Operation on Startup
When the power is turned ON the setting of dip switch 1 is displayed the operation preparation status
followed by
, and then a self check is performed. While the self check is in progress, the following displays are repeated.
1
• Key Lock Status
A key lock function is included for preventing accidental manipulation of the MW100 front panel keys. The key lock status is indicated by a dot at the bottom of the unit number. The example shown is for a unit of number 00.
• Keylock release • Keylock
Unit number Unit number and dot
• In-Progress Display
The following displays cycle while the CF card is being accessed or while calibration is being performed.
• Operation Error Display
In error Exxx (where xxx is a three-digit number), the code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately. In the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right, and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code.
Example: Error code E234
Up to three error codes are saved.
For the contents of error codes and their meanings, see section 4.1, “Errors Displayed on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions.” You can clear one error that is displayed by pressing the Stop key.
IM MW100-01E
1-11
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Measurement
Measured data sampled at certain intervals is acquired by the various input modules.
Acquired data is saved to the CF card.
In addition, the main module receives output commands sent from the PC as necessary and generates signal output instructions to the output modules.
Measurement Intervals
• Synchronization between modules
If set to the same measurement interval, measurements made by input modules in the same acquisition unit are synchronized.
• Synchronization between channels
On the 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module and 10-CH High-Speed Digital
Input Module, measurement is synchronized between channels.
On the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module, Six-Channel Medium-Speed
Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module, and 4-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module, since measurement occurs sequentially by channel, it is not synchronized between channels (it can be said to be synchronized within measurement intervals).
Multi interval
Measurement Groups
Three measurement intervals can be set, and measurement channels can be assigned to each interval. There is a particular order in which measurement intervals can be set to measurement groups. For more information, see section 3.4, “Setting Acquisition
Conditions for Measured and Computed Data.”
Filters
A first-order lag filter is available. You can select a time constant (time until 63.2% of the output value is reached) corresponding to the measurement interval indicated in the equation below.
Time constant = measurement interval
×
N (where N = 5, 10, 20, 25, 40, 50, or 100)
For details, see section 2.10, “Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition
Unit.”
MATH
Differential computation between channels and linear scaling are possible. Linear scaling converts the measured values for a specific purpose (scaled values) using the following equation.
Scale value =
(X – SP min
)
×
(SC max
– SC min
)
+ SC min
SP max
– SP min
X: Measured value
SP max
: Specified span maximum
SP min
: Specified span minimum
SC max
: Specified scale maximum
SC min
: Specified scale minimum
MATH Types
Differential computation between channels
Linear scaling
Notation
DELTA
SCALE
MATH (/M1 Option)
Expressions using measured and computed data as variables can be entered and executed on channels dedicated for computation, and the results can be displayed and saved. Computations are executed every measurement interval (shortest interval is 100 ms).
For details, see section 1.13, “MATH Functions (/M1 Option).”
1-12
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Remote RJC (RRJC)
When the item to be measured is located at a great distance, you can setup relay terminals near the item, measure between the relay terminal and the input terminal of the universal input module (reference channel) using thermocouples, and use the resultant value as the reference junction compensation of the temperature measurement. By connecting the relay terminal and the input terminal of the universal input module using copper wires and connecting the item to be measured and the relay terminal using thermocouples, you can make temperature measurements without having to use large quantities of high-cost thermocouples.
MW100 Relay terminal (to be furnished by the user)
Thermocouple*
Reference channel
Copper wire
Thermocouple*
Copper wire Thermocouple*
Burnout
Alarms
IM MW100-01E
* Use the same type of thermocouples.
When the input mode is set to thermocouple (TC), you can set the burnout detection behavior. Measured values become “range over” during detection.
Detection Behavior
No detection
Measured values fixed at +range over
Measured values fixed at –range over
Notation
OFF
UP
DOWN
The main module compares the measured values against preset alarm values and outputs alarm signals based on the result from the digital output module. The following four types of alarms can be output.
Type
Upper limit alarm
Lower limit alarm
Differential upper limit alarm DH
(during differential computation)
Differential lower limit alarm
(during differential computation)
DL
High limit on rate-of-change alarm
RH
Notation Actions
H Generates an alarm when the measured value exceeds the alarm value.
L Generates an alarm when the measured value falls below the alarm value.
Generates an alarm when the difference between the measured values of two alarms exceeds the alarm value.
Generates an alarm when the difference between the measured values of two alarms falls below the alarm value.
Generates and alarm when the rate of change in rising measured values exceeds the alarm value.
Low limit on rate-of-change alarm
RL Generates and alarm when the rate of change in falling measured values falls below the alarm xvalue.
Alarm Value Hysteresis
You can set a width (hysteresis) to the values used to activate and release alarms. Alarm hysteresis can prevent frequent activation and release of alarms when the measured value is unstable around the alarm value.
Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm
Alarm activated
Alarm setting
Measured value
Alarm release
Hysteresis
Alarm setting
Measured vale
Alarm release
Alarm activated
1-13
1
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Alarm Output Timing
The output interval is 100 ms. Therefore, when the measurement interval is 10 ms or 50 ms, the alarm output data is accumulated over 100-ms intervals and output at 100-ms intervals based on the accumulated data.
Rate of Change Upper Limit / Lower Limit Alarm
The rate of change of the measured values is checked over the rate-of-change detection interval. An alarm occurs if the rate of change of the measured value in the rising direction exceeds the specified value.
Low limit on rate-of-change alarm High limit on rate-of-change alarm
Change in the measured value
T
2
Amount of change in the setting
T
1
T
1
T
2
Amount of change in the setting
T –T
2
Time
Change in the computed value
Time t
1
Interval t –t
1 t
2 t
1
Interval t –t
1 t
2
Alarm Hold/Non-Hold
You can select whether, when factors resulting in output cease to exist, alarms are cleared when the output factors are cleared, or alarms are held for their full duration
(alarm ACK*).
• When set to non-hold • When set to hold
Alarm ACK Alarm ACK
Output cause occurrence
ON
Alarm
OFF
Output cause occurrence
ON
Alarm
OFF
Status lamp
ALARM
Monitor screen
alarm view
Status lamp
ALARM
Monitor screen
alarm view
* By clicking the Alarm ACK button in the browser’s monitoring screen or by sending an equivalent communication command.
Operation Modes and Statuses
The MW100 has a Setting mode in which input ranges and other settings can be entered, and a Measurement mode in which data acquisition is performed. The mode switches depending on the measurement item of the status information.
Mode Status Info
Measurement
STOP
Description
Setting mode For entering range, system, communication, and display settings
For data monitoring, computation, and recording Measurement mode START
* The instrument must be in measurement mode in order for the status of computation and recording to be START.
1-14
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Tag Strings
You can select whether to display tags or channel numbers on all channels.
Communication Specifications
The MW100 can communicate with external devices using its Ethernet or serial communication port.
Login Function
This function ensures that only previously registered users can obtain access when communicating with the MW100.
For instructions, see section 3.2, “Connecting to the MW100.” There are two levels of user access rights as follows:
Level Notation Description
Administrator privileges ADMIN All functions are available.
User privileges USER Measured/computed data, settings, log information, alarm summaries, and status information can be obtained.
Administrator privileges required to switch operation modes, start/stop computation and recording, or change settings such as the measuring range.
Ethernet Communication
Using 10Base-T media, the MW100 supports the FTP, SNTP, DHCP, DNS, HTTP,
Modbus/TCP, SMTP, and MW-specific protocols.
• Web Server Function
MW100 settings and data can be monitored from a PC using a browser.
• DHCP Client Function
The IP address can be automatically obtained from the DHCP server.
• SNTP Function
Acting as a client, the MW can obtain time information from the specified SNTP server when the power is turned ON. When acting as the server, the unit can provide time information to other MW100s connected to the network.
• FTP Function
As a client, the MW can send acquired data files to an FTP server. Two recipient locations can be specified. When acting as the server, the MW can transfer or delete files according to commands from a PC.
• E-Mail Function
Alarm occurrences and creation of data files can be notified via e-mail. Two recipients locations can be specified.
• Modbus Client Function(/M1 option)
The MW100 can connect to a Modbus server device and load measured data. Using
Modbus commands, the MW100 can load data from the Modbus server at regular intervals. Loaded data are assigned to the communication input channels (C001-
C300) of the MATH function (/M1 option). Up to ten Modbus servers can be registered.
Ethernet
MW100
MW100
1
MW100(Client) MW100(server)
IM MW100-01E
1-15
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
• Modbus Server Function (See Figure on Previous Page)
Modbus clients connect to an MW100 acting as the Modbus Server, and read from or write to its internal registers.
Measured data and alarm statuses from measurement channels, measured data and alarm statuses from MATH channels, data from communication input channels, and time information are stored in the MW100’s registers. Up to four clients can be connected simultaneously.
RS-422A/485 Communication (/C3 Option)
In a multi-drop, four-wire configuration, up to thirty-two units can be connected. A dedicated protocol and the ModbusRTU protocol are supported.
• Using communication commands, you can send and receive settings, and measured and computed values.
• Modbus Master Function
The MW100 can connect to a Modbus slave device and load measured data. The operation is the same as the Modbus client function. Target devices (Modbus slaves) are identified with addresses.
MW100(master)
MW100
Data from slave device
Data to slave device
Serial communication
Modbus slave device
• Modbus Slave Function
Modbus master devices can connect to other MW100s acting as Modbus slaves and read from or write to their internal registers. The MW100 registers are the same as those for the Modbus server function.
Modbus master device
Data to master device
Data from master device
MW100
Serial communication
1-16
MW100(slave)
Modbus slave device
For instructions on connections, see section 2.7, “Connections Using the RS-422A/485
Interface (/C3 Option).”
RS-232 Communication (/C2 Option)
This is a point-to-point system. A dedicated protocol and the Modbus/RTU protocol are supported.
• Using communication commands, you can send and receive settings, and measured and computed values.
• The MW100 operates as the Modbus master or slave. For information about the operation, see “RS-422A/485 Communications (/C3 Option).”
For instructions on connections, see section 2.8, “Interface Connections (/C2 Option).”
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Saving Data to the CF Card
Save Location
Measured/computed data, thinned data, data acquisition logs, alarm summaries, and settings can be saved on the CF card.
These files are saved in the folder structure shown in the figure.
Settings folder
Save folders for measured, computed, and thinned data
The DATA folder includes all folders up to DATAxxxx
Folders are created each time recording starts from DATA0000 to DATAxxxx.
"xxxx" is automatically generated from 0000 to 9999
Saving Measured Data and Computed Data
Files can be created for every measurement group. An individual file is created for computed data. For each measurement group, you can select whether or not to perform the save operation.
The table below shows the approximate interval over which data can be saved to the CF card when one measurement interval is used.
Save Channel
10 ch
Measurement Interval
10 ms
100 ms
1 s
Capacity of the CF Card
128 MB 512 MB
8.8 hours
3.7 days
37 days
35.3 hours
14.8 days
148 days
Saving Thinned Data
Data is saved at a specified thinning interval. Thinning time:
4, 5, 10, 20, or 30 seconds, or 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, or 30 minutes, or 1 hour.
Select a thinning time from the above choices.
Recording Operation
The following three recording operations are available for measured, computed, and thinned data.
Mode
Single
Full stop
Rotate
Display
SINGLE
Operation
One file of a specified size is created on the CF card, then recording stops.
FULLSTOP Files of the specified size are created until the capacity of the card is reached, then writing to the card stops.
ROTATE Files of the specified size are created until the capacity of the card is reached, then if the capacity is exceeded, new data is written over the oldest data, and the process continues.
1
IM MW100-01E
1-17
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Recording Start Operation
The following three operations for starting of recording to the CF card are available.
Type
None
Direct
Trigger
Notation
OFF
DIRECT
TRIGGER
Operation
Does not record.
Starts recording at the same time as recording to the internal memory starts
Enters trigger wait mode when recording starts. Recording is started after an event occurs.
* There are no triggers for recording of thinned data.
Pretrigger Function
When selecting Trigger, a pre-trigger can be set in units of ten percent of the data length.
Writing starts simultaneously with recording, and after a trigger event occurs, the data remaining after removal of the pretrigger data is written.
Saving Settings
MW100 setting values can be saved. The contents that are saved are as follows:
• Range, alarm, and MATH related settings
• Media related settings
• Communication related settings
• Other settings
However, when settings are loaded onto the MW100, the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, host name, and domain name are not loaded.
Format
Initializes the CF Card.
Daylight saving time
The internal clock is updated every specified month, week, day, and time.
Timer
The Event/Action function can be started according to timer settings.
The following two timers are available.
Type
Relative Time Timer
Notation
RELATIVE
Description
Time up occurs at the specified time interval
Absolute Time Timer ABSOLUTE Time up occurs at a time interval after a specified reference time**
* Operation upon power failure differs. For details, see chapter 5, “Specifications.”
** Also valid prior to the reference time.
Match Time
The Event/Action function can be started according to the match time setting.
The following three match times are available.
Type
Monthly
Notation Description
MONTH Time up occurs every month on specified date and time (hr and min)
Weekly WEEK Time up occurs every every week on the specified day of the week and time (hr and min)
Time up occurs every day at the specified time (hr and min) Daily DAY
* Conditions can be set for no operation. For details, see chapter 5, “Specifications.”
** For information about operation during power failures and time changes, see chapter 5,
“Specifications.”
1-18
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Event/Action Function
By linking the Event function and Action function, you can control the operations of the main unit. The following types of events are available. Some items may not be available depending on the options installed.
Start Specification
Channel number
Event Type
Contact input
Alarm occurrence
Alarm on specified channel
Recording start
Relay action
Notation
DI
ALARM
ALARM_CH
MEMORY
RELAY
Timer event occurrence TIMER
Match time event occurrence MATCH_TIME
User function key USER_KEY
Channel number, alarm level number
Relay number
Timer number
Match time number
Keys number
IM MW100-01E
The following Actions are available. The items that can be set differ according to the events and event detection method.
Action Notation Detection Method
Edge Level
Recording start*
Recording stop*
Computation start
Computation stop
Clear computed values
Reset computed values
Reset MATH on specified
MATH group number
(Gr.1-7)
Trigger occurrence on specified number
MEMORY_START
MEMORY_STOP
MATH_START
MATH_STOP
MATH_CLEAR
MATH_RESET
MATH_RST_GR1
MATH_RST_GR2
MATH_RST_GR3
MATH_RST_GR4
MATH_RST_GR5
MATH_RST_GR6
MATH_RST_GR7
TRIGGER1
TRIGGER2
TRIGGER3
ALARM_ACK
FLAG
Alarm ACK
Flag
Reset timer of specified number (1-6)
Write message on specified number
TIMER1_RESET
TIMER2_RESET
TIMER3_RESET
TIMER4_RESET
TIMER5_RESET
TIMER6_RESET
MESSAGE1
MESSAGE2
MESSAGE3
MESSAGE4
MESSAGE5
FILE_SAVE Save specified file**
Load specified file** FILE_LOAD
* Cannot be selected when the event is Recording start.
** Cannot be selected when the event is User function key.
Event detection methods
Method
Edge
Level
Notation
EDGE
LEVEL
Description
Edge event
State event
1-19
1
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Log Information
Saving the Data Acquisition Log File
While recording is stopped, information related to operation of the CF card and power
ON/OFF status is saved in text format to a log file with the name RECORDLG.TXT. For information about log statuses and messages, see the MW100 Communication
Command manual (IM MW100-17E).
Information Saved to the Log File
• When power is turned OFF or ON
• When CF card is inserted or ejected
• When CF card is formatted
• Upon recording stop or start, etc.
• File creation or deletion
• Triggers
• Time synchronization
• Errors
• Log saving
Example of a Log File
Yokogawa DAQMASTER MW100 <Record Info>
Date Time Status Message
05/01/01 00:00:01 Power on
05/03/25 09:58:13 Format ok
05/03/25 10:00:03 Create DATA0033
05/03/25 10:00:00 Record start 1
05/03/25 10:00:05 Mode rotate -T-
05/03/25 10:00:05 (100ms) 1H / 12cells
05/03/25 10:00:05 10CHs 1409KB
05/03/25 10:00:06 Create 32510100
05/03/25 11:00:15 Create 32510101
05/03/25 12:00:15 Create 32510102
05/03/25 12:40:35 Record stop 1
05/03/25 12:41:25 Create ALARMLG
05/03/25 12:14:26 Create RECORDLG
>>
Time indicating when settings were initialized*
Time after internal clock is reset*
Recording starts
Data file creation
Recording stops
Newest information
Termination mark
* When settings are initialized, the MW100 initial time value of 2005/01/01 00:00:00 is set.
After than, if the time is reset, the time after the change is recorded.
Saving Alarm Summaries
During the recording stop operation, alarm summary information is saved in text format to a log file named ALARMLG.TXT.
Example of an Alarm Summary
Date Time Channel Alarm status*
EA
05/03/25 10:12:13.000 001 1H off
05/03/25 11:14:12.000 001 1H on
05/03/25 11:14:12.000 002 3L off
05/03/25 11:14:13.000 001 1H off
05/03/25 11:14:21.000 001 2H off
05/03/25 11:14:36.000 002 3L on
05/03/25 11:14:36.000 001 1H on
05/03/25 11:14:54.000 001 2H on
05/03/25 11:15:18.000 002 3L off
05/03/25 11:15:22.000 005 4L off
05/03/25 11:15:25.000 005 4L on
EN
* The following are the alarm statuses.
Alarm number
Alarm type
ON/OFF
1H off
Newest information
Termination mark
Note
While recording is paused during measurement, if the Stop key is held down, the data acquisition log and alarm summary log are created in the root directory of the CF card.
1-20
IM MW100-01E
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Log Output
The following logs can be output using communication commands. For information about log statuses and messages, see the MW100 Communication Command manual (IM
MW100-17E).
Item
Operation error log
Alarm summary
Strain input initial balance result
Data acquisition log
Recording status
Message summary
Communication log
Operation log
Computation status
Mail client log
Time synchronization client log
HTTP server log
DHCP client log
FTP client log
FTP server log
Modbus client log
Modbus client command status
Modbus client connection status
Modbus master log
Modbus master command status
Modbus master connection status
COM
CMD
MATH
SMTP
SNTP
HTTP
DHCP
FTP_C
Notation
ERROR
ALARM
BALANCE
RECORD
RECSTATUS
MESSAGE
FTP_S
Modbus_C
Modbus_CC
Modbus_CS
Modbus_M
Modbus_MC
Modbus_MS
Request Type
No. saved
No. saved
No. displayed
No. saved
No. saved
No. saved
No. saved
No. saved
No. saved
No. saved
No. saved
No. saved
No. saved
No. saved
No. saved
No. saved
No. displayed
No. displayed
No. saved
No. displayed
No. displayed
E-Mail Function
IM MW100-01E
Notification can be made of alarm occurrences and creation of data files by e-mail. Two recipient locations can be specified. Multiple addresses can be specified for each recipient location. For details about e-mail contents, see chapter 5, “Specifications.”
E-Mail Types
The following types of e-mail can be generated.
E-Mail Type Operation and Contents of E-Mail
Alarm notification E-mail is sent when measurement or MATH alarms are activated or cleared.
Contents: Channels, levels, and types of alarms that were activated or cleared, instantaneous values of measurement and MATH channels (when selected)
File creation notification
Notification of remaining space on media
Notification of power ON
E-mail is sent when a measured, computed, or thinned data file is created.
Contents: Created file name and time of send request
E-mail is sent when the remaining time on the CF card is determined to be less than the specified time.
Contents: Total and remaining space on CF card, and the time of send request
E-mail is sent when the power is turned ON.
Contents: Time power was cut and turned ON
Error notification E-mail is sent when an operation error occurs.
Contents: Error number and message, and time of send request
Fixed time report E-mail is sent every specified time interval.
Contents: Instantaneous values of the measurement and MATH channels
(when selected) and the time of send request
Reference time setting: Set in units of one-minute between 00:00 and 23:59
Time interval: Select 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, or 24 h
Test E-mail is sent when test is executed.
If a mail send request occurs during sending of another message, the request is ignored.
1-21
1
1.3 Functions of the Main Module
Subject
The e-mail transmission type is added to the subject. A user-specified string can be added to the transmission type in the subject.
The following subject topics are available.
E-Mail Type
Alarm notification
File creation notification
Subject
[Alarm Summary] + user specified string
[File End] + user specified string
Notification of remaining space on media [Media Remain] + user specified string
Notification of power ON [Power Failure] + user specified string
Error notification
Fixed time report
Test
[ERROR] + user specified string
[Periodic Data] + user specified string
[Test] + user specified string
E-mail Retransmission
If e-mail transmission fails, it will be retried two more times at about thirty to sixty second intervals.
If retransmission fails twice, the e-mail is deleted without being sent. Retransmission is not performed if the e-mail type is Test.
Example of an E-Mail Transmission
• Alarm notification e-mail
From: [email protected]
Date: Fri,25 Mar 2005 19:57:00 +0900
Subject: [Alarm Summary]
To: [email protected], [email protected]
Alarm Summary
<Time>
DATE 05/03/25
TIME 19:56:32
<Alarm Summary>
01 2h on
04 4H off
33 2r on
:
A005 2H off
<CH Data>
N 01 mV +12345E-1
N 04 mV +12345E-1
N 05 mV +12345E-1
:
N A001 +12345678E-1
N A002 +12345678E-1
:
• Power supply ON notification e-mail
From: [email protected]
Date: Fri,25 Mar 2005 19:57:00 +0900
Subject: [Power Faliure]
To: [email protected], [email protected]
Power Faliure
<Power Off>
DATE 05/03/24
TIME 19:58:28
<Power On>
DATE 05/03/25
TIME 19:56:40
Mail header
Date and time when alarm occurs
Alarm contents
Instantaneous measured and computed values
Mail header
Date/time power failed
Date/time power restored
1-22
IM MW100-01E
1.4
Functions of the 4-CH, High-Speed Universal
Input Module
This module allows up to four inputs of DC voltage, thermocouple, 3-wire RTD, or digital input (DI) at a minimum measurement interval of 10 ms.
1
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Measurement Input Types
Measurement Input Type
Do not measure
DC voltage
Thermocouple
Notation
SKIP
VOLT
TC
Resistance temperature detector RTD
DI DI
Remote RJC RRJC
Measuring Range
DC Voltage
Measuring Range
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2 V
6 V
20 V
100 V
60 mV (high resolution)
1 V
6 V (high resolution)
Notation
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2 V
6 V
20 V
100 V
60 mVH
1 V
6 VH
Thermocouple
Measuring Range
Type-R
Type-S
Type-B
Type-K
Type-E
Type-J
Type-T
Type-N
Type-W
Type-L
J
T
K
E
N
W
L
S
B
Notation
R
IM MW100-01E
Rated Measurement Range
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
–100.00 to 100.00 V
0.000 to 60.000 mV
–1.0000 to 1.0000 V
0.0000 to 6.0000 V
Rated Measuring Range
0.0 to 1760.0
° C
0.0 to 1760.0
° C
0.0 to 1820.0
°
C
–200.0 to 1370.0
° C
–200.0 to 800.0
° C
–200.0 to 1100.0
° C
–200.0 to 400.0
° C
0.0 to 1300.0
° C
0.0 to 2315.0
° C
–200.0 to 900.0
°
C
1-23
1.4 Functions of the 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module
Thermocouple (cont.)
Measuring Range
Type-U
KPvsAu7Fe
PLATINEL
PR40-20
NiNiMo
WRe3-25
W/WRe26
Type-N (AWG14)
TXK GOST
Notation
U
KPvsAu7Fe
PLATINEL
PR40-20
NiNiMo
WRe3-25
WWRe26
N14
XK
Resistance Temperature Detector (1 mA)
Measuring Range
Pt100
JPt100
Pt100 (high resolution)
JPt100 (high resolution)
Ni100 SAMA
Ni100 DIN
Ni120
Pt100 (high noise resistance)
JPt100 (high noise resistance)
Pt100 GOST
Notation
Pt100-1
JPt100-1
Pt100-1H
JPt100-1H
Ni100SAMA
Ni100DIN
Ni120
Pt100-1R
JPt100-1R
Pt100G
Resistance Temperature Detector (2 mA)
Measuring Range
Pt100
JPt100
Pt100 (high resolution)
JPt100 (high resolution)
Pt50
Cu10 GE
Cu10 L&N
Cu10 WEED
Cu10 BAILEY
J263B
Cu10 at 20 ° C alpha=0.00392
Cu10 at 20 ° C alpha=0.00393
Cu25 at 0 ° C alpha=0.00425
Cu53 at 0
°
C alpha=0.00426035
Cu100 at 0
°
C alpha=0.00425
Pt25 (JPt100 × 1/4)
Cu10 GE (high resolution)
Cu10 L&N (high resolution)
Cu10 WEED (high resolution)
Cu10 BAILEY (high resolution)
Notation
Pt100-2
JPt100-2
Pt100-2H
JPt100-2H
Pt50
Cu10GE
Cu10LN
Cu10WEED
Cu10BAILEY
J263B
Cu10a392
Cu10a393
Cu25
Cu53
Cu100
Pt25
Cu10GEH
Cu10LNH
Cu10WEEDH
Cu10BAILEYH
1-24
Rated Measuring Range
–200.0 to 400.0
°
C
0.0 to 300.0K
0.0 to 1400.0
° C
0.0 to 1900.0
° C
0.0 to 1310.0
° C
0.0 to 2400.0
° C
0.0 to 2400.0
° C
0.0 to 1300.0
°
C
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
Rated Measuring Range
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
–200.0 to 550.0
° C
–140.00 to 150.00
° C
–140.00 to 150.00
° C
–200.0 to 250.0
° C
–60.0 to 180.0
° C
–70.0 to 200.0
° C
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
–200.0 to 550.0
°
C
–200.0 to 600.0
° C
Rated Measuring Range
–200.0 to 250.0
° C
–200.0 to 250.0
° C
–140.00 to 150.00
° C
–140.00 to 150.00
° C
–200.0 to 550.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
0.0 to 300.0K
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–50.0 to 150.0
°
C
–50.0 to 150.0
°
C
–200.0 to 550.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
IM MW100-01E
1.4 Functions of the 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module
Resistance Temperature Detector (2 mA, cont.)
Measuring Range
Pt100 (high noise resistance)
JPt100 (high noise resistance)
Cu100 GOST
Cu50 GOST
Cu10 GOST
Notation
Pt100-2R
JPt100-2R
Cu100G
Cu50G
Cu10G
Rated Measuring Range
–200.0 to 250.0
°
C
–200.0 to 250.0
° C
–200.0 to 200.0
° C
–200.0 to 200.0
° C
–200.0 to 200.0
° C
DI
Measuring Range
LEVEL
Contact input
Notation
LEVEL
CONTACT
Rated Measuring Range
Vth=2.4V
100 Ω or less, ON, 10 k Ω or less, OFF
Measurement Interval, Integration Time, and Filter
You can select from the following measurement intervals for this module.
10 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 60 s
The integral time and types of filters applied vary depending on the measurement interval. For details, see section 2.10, “Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data
Acquisition Unit.”
Measurement Synchronization
Measurement is synchronized on each channel.
1
IM MW100-01E
1-25
1.5
Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed
Universal Input Module
This module allows up to ten inputs of DC voltage, thermocouple, 3-wire RTD, and digital input (DI) at a minimum measurement interval of 100 ms.
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Measurement Input Types
Measurement Input Type
No measurement
DC voltage
Thermocouple
Notation
SKIP
VOLT
TC
Resistance temperature detector RTD
DI DI
Remote RJC RRJC
Measuring Range
DC Voltage
Measuring Range
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2 V
6 V
20 V
100 V
60 mV (high resolution)
1 V
6 V (high resolution)
Notation
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2 V
6 V
20 V
100 V
60 mVH
1 V
6 VH
Thermocouple
Measuring Range
Type-R
Type-S
Type-B
Type-K
Type-E
Type-J
Type-T
Type-N
Type-W
J
T
K
E
S
B
Notation
R
N
W
1-26
Rated Measuring Range
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
–100.00 to 100.00 V
0.000 to 60.000 mV
–1.0000 to 1.0000 V
0.0000 to 6.0000 V
Rated Measuring Range
0.0 to 1760.0
° C
0.0 to 1760.0
° C
0.0 to 1820.0
°
C
–200.0 to 1370.0
° C
–200.0 to 800.0
° C
–200.0 to 1100.0
° C
–200.0 to 400.0
° C
0.0 to 1300.0
° C
0.0 to 2315.0
° C
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
1.5 Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module
Thermocouple (cont.)
Measuring Range
Type-L
Type-U
KPvsAu7Fe
PLATINEL
PR40-20
NiNiMo
WRe3-25
W/WRe26
Type-N (AWG14)
TXK GOST
Notation
L
U
KPvsAu7Fe
PLATINEL
PR40-20
NiNiMo
WRe3-25
WWRe26
N14
XK
Rated Measuring Range
–200.0 to 900.0
° C
–200.0 to 400.0
° C
0.0 to 300.0 K
0.0 to 1400.0
° C
0.0 to 1900.0
° C
0.0 to 1310.0
° C
0.0 to 2400.0
°
C
0.0 to 2400.0
° C
0.0 to 1300.0
° C
–200.0 to 600.0
° C
Resistance Temperature Detector (1 mA)
Measuring Range
Pt100
JPt100
Pt100 (high resolution)
JPt100 (high resolution)
Ni100 SAMA
Ni100 DIN
Ni120
Pt50
Cu10 GE
Cu10 L&N
Cu10 WEED
Cu10 BAILEY
J263B
Cu10 at 20 ° C alpha=0.00392
Cu10 at 20 ° C alpha=0.00393
Cu25 at 0 ° C alpha=0.00425
Cu53 at 0 ° C alpha=0.00426035
Cu100 at 0 ° C alpha=0.00425
Pt25 (JPt100 × 1/4)
Cu10 GE (high resolution)
Cu10 L&N (high resolution)
Cu10 WEED (high resolution)
Cu10 BAILEY (high resolution)
Pt100 GOST
Cu100 GOST
Cu50 GOST
Cu10 GOST
Notation
Pt100-1
JPt100-1
Pt100-1H
JPt100-1H
Ni100SAMA
Ni100DIN
Ni120
Pt50
Cu10GE
Cu10LN
Cu10WEED
Cu10BAILEY
J263B
Cu10a392
Cu10a393
Cu25
Cu53
Cu100
Pt25
Cu10GEH
Cu10LNH
Cu10WEEDH
Cu10BAILEYH
Pt100G
Cu100G
Cu50G
Cu10G
Rated Measuring Range
–200.0 to 600.0
° C
–200.0 to 550.0
° C
–140.00 to 150.00
° C
–140.00 to 150.00
°
C
–200.0 to 250.0
°
C
–60.0 to 180.0
° C
–70.0 to 200.0
° C
–200.0 to 550.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
0.0 to 300.0 K
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–50.0 to 150.0
° C
–50.0 to 150.0
° C
–200.0 to 550.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 600.0
° C
–200.0 to 200.0
° C
–200.0 to 200.0
° C
–200.0 to 200.0
° C
1
1-27
1.5 Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module
DI
Measuring Range
LEVEL
Contact input
Notation
LEVEL
CONTACT
Rated Measuring Range
Vth=2.4 V
1 k Ω or less, ON, 100 k Ω or less, OFF
(shunt capacitance: 0.01 µ F or less)
Measurement Interval, Integration Time, and Filter
You can select from the following measurement intervals for this module.
100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 60 s
The integral time and types of filters applied vary depending on the measurement interval. For details, see section 2.10, “Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data
Acquisition Unit.”
If the measurement interval is 100 ms, burnout detection is performed on one channel during one measurement interval. After measurement starts when in the burnout condition, or after the burnout, burnout detection is disabled for up to ten measurements
(approximately one second).
Measurement Synchronization
Since measurement is sequential, measurement on each channel is not synchronized.
1-28
IM MW100-01E
1.6
Functions of the 6-CH, Medium-Speed
Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module
This module allows up to six inputs of DC voltage, thermocouple, 4-wire RTD, 4-wire resistance, and digital input (DI) at a minimum measurement interval of 100 ms.
1
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Measurement Input Types
Measurement Input Type
No measurement
Notation
SKIP
DC voltage VOLT
Resistance temperature detector RTD
Resistance
DI
OHM
DI
Measuring Range
DC Voltage
Measuring Range
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2 V
6 V
20 V
100 V
60 mV (high resolution)
1 V
6 V (high resolution)
Notation
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2 V
6 V
20 V
100 V
60 mVH
1 V
6 VH
Resistance Temperature Detector (1 mA)
Measuring Range
Pt100
JPt100
Pt100 (high resolution)
JPt100 (high resolution)
Ni100 SAMA
Ni100 DIN
Ni120
Pt50
Cu10 GE
Cu10 L&N
Cu10 WEED
Cu10 BAILEY
Notation
Pt100-1
JPt100-1
Pt100-1H
JPt100-1H
Ni100SAMA
Ni100DIN
Ni120
Pt50
Cu10GE
Cu10LN
Cu10WEED
Cu10BAILEY
IM MW100-01E
Rated Measuring Range
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
–100.00 to 100.00 V
0.000 to 60.000 mV
–1.0000 to 1.0000 V
0.0000 to 6.0000 V
Rated Measuring Range
–200.0 to 600.0
° C
–200.0 to 550.0
° C
–140.00 to 150.00
° C
–140.00 to 150.00
° C
–200.0 to 250.0
°
C
–60.0 to 180.0
°
C
–70.0 to 200.0
° C
–200.0 to 550.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
1-29
1.6 Functions of the 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module
Resistance Temperature Detector (1 mA, cont.)
Measuring Range
J263B
Cu10 at 20 ° C alpha=0.00392
Cu10 at 20 ° C alpha=0.00393
Cu25 at 0 ° C alpha=0.00425
Cu53 at 0 ° C alpha=0.00426035
Cu100 at 0
°
C alpha=0.00425
Pt25 (JPt100
×
1/4)
Cu10 GE (high resolution)
Cu10 L&N (high resolution)
Cu10 WEED (high resolution)
Cu10 BAILEY (high resolution)
Pt100 GOST
Cu100 GOST
Cu50 GOST
Cu10 GOST
Notation
J263B
Cu10a392
Cu10a393
Cu25
Cu53
Cu100
Pt25
Cu10GEH
Cu10LNH
Cu10WEEDH
Cu10BAILEYH
Pt100G
Cu100G
Cu50G
Cu10G
Rated Measuring Range
0.0 to 300.0K
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–50.0 to 150.0
° C
–50.0 to 150.0
°
C
–200.0 to 550.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 300.0
° C
–200.0 to 600.0
° C
–200.0 to 200.0
° C
–200.0 to 200.0
° C
–200.0 to 200.0
°
C
Resistance Temperature Detector (0.25 mA)
Measuring Range
Pt500
Pt1000
Notation
Pt500
Pt1000
Rated Measuring Range
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
–200.0 to 600.0
° C
Resistance
Measuring Range Notation
20 Ω (measured current 1 mA)
200 Ω (measured current 1 mA)
20 ohm
200 ohm
2 k Ω (measured current 0.25 mA) 2000 ohm
DI
Measuring Range
LEVEL
Contact input
Notation
LEVEL
CONTACT
Rated Measuring Range
0.000 to 20.000 Ω
0.00 to 200.00 Ω
0.0 to 2000.0 Ω
Rated Measuring Range
Vth=2.4V
1 k Ω or less, ON, 100 k Ω or less, OFF
(shunt capacitance: 0.01 µ F or less)
Measurement Interval, Integration Time, and Filter
You can select from the following measurement intervals for this module.
100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 60 s
The integral time and types of filters applied vary depending on the measurement interval. For details, see section 2.10, “Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data
Acquisition Unit.”
Measurement Synchronization
Since measurement is sequential, measurement on each channel is not synchronized.
1-30
IM MW100-01E
1.7
Functions of the 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain
Input Module
This module allows up to four inputs of measurement from strain gauges and strain gauge type sensors at a minimum measurement interval of 100 ms.
-B12, -B35 -NDI
Terminal cover
NDIS terminal
Input terminal
(clamp terminal)
Measurement Input Types
Measurement Input Type
No measurement
Strain
Measuring Range
Strain Input
Measurement Range Type
2000 µ STR
20000 µ STR
200000 µ STR
Notation
SKIP
STR
Notation
2000 uSTR
20000 uSTR
200000 uSTR
Rated Measuring Range
–2000.0 to 2000.0 µ STR
–20000 to 20000 µ STR
–200000 to 200000 µ STR
Measurement Interval, Integration Time, and Filter
You can select from the following measurement intervals for this module.
100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 60 s
The integral time and types of filters applied vary depending on the measurement interval. For details, see section 2.10, “Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data
Acquisition Unit.”
Measurement Synchronization
Since measurement is sequential, measurement on each channel is not synchronized.
1
1-31
IM MW100-01E
1.7 Functions of the 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module
Initial Balancing (Unbalance Adjustment)
When configuring a bridge circuit with a strain gauge, due to the slight deviation in resistance of the strain gauge, the bridge circuit will not necessarily be balanced even if the strain of the circuit under test is zero, and the measured value may not be zero (the value in such cases is called the initial unbalanced value).
Therefore, when taking measurements you must first balance the bridge and if the strain is zero, obtain a measured value of zero. This is called initial balancing (setting the initial unbalanced value to zero).
Measured value
Initial unbalanced value
Reset
0
Initial balance
Strain
With the MW100, initial balancing is performed in the ± 10000 µ strain range.
Initial balance: The value when the command is executed is taken as the initial unbalanced value, and the measured value is set to zero.
Reset: The value set during initial balancing is reset to zero. The initial unbalanced value is used for the measured value as-is.
Note
If the measuring range is changed, the initial balancing is reset.
After a range change, you must redo initial balancing.
Initial Balance Selection Items
Type
Reset
Execute
Notation
RESET
EXECUTE
Description
Resets the initial balance values.
Executes initial balancing.
1-32
IM MW100-01E
1.7 Functions of the 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module
Scaling Settings of the Strain Gauge Type Sensor
This is an explanation of scaling settings used to measure physical quantities such as load and length using a strain gauge type sensor.
The basic relational equation is as follows.
1 mV/V = 2000
µ
STR (equation 1)
The following gives two examples, one when the rated input and output are known, and one when the calibration coefficient is known. (Hereinafter,
µ
-strain will be expressed as
µ STR).
When the Rated Input and Output Are Known
The following specific example provides an explanation.
• Rated input
• Rated output
200N
0.985 mV/V
(set to Y)
(set to K)
In this case, if a 200 N load is introduced, an output of 0.985 mV/V results.
From the relationship in equation 1, if 200 N is applied, it means that an output of: 0.985 mV/V = 0.985*2000 = 1970 µ STR is obtained.
In other words, for each 1N, 1970 µ STR/200N = 9.85 µ STR/N of output results.
Therefore, the scaling settings are entered as follows.
When Measuring at 50 to 150 N
Scale minimum: 50
Scale maximum: 150
(set to Smin)
(units: N) (set to Smax) therefore,
Span minimum: 50 × 9.85 µ STR/N = 492.5 µ STR
Span maximum: 150 × 9.85 = 1477.5 µ STR would be appropriate settings.
Hence, the measuring range is 2000 µ STR.
Generally, the range is as follows.
Using the symbols explained up to now, after setting the minimum and maximum scale, we can describe the minimum and maximum values of span as:
Min. value of span = [(K(mV/V)
×
2000) / Y(unit)]
×
Smin (
µ
STR)
Max. value of span = [(K(mV/V) × 2000) / Y(unit)] × Smax ( µ STR)
1
IM MW100-01E
1-33
1.7 Functions of the 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module
When the Calibration Coefficient is Known
An example using a displacement gauge provides an explanation.
• Rated input 20 mm
• Calibration coefficient 0.003998 mm / (1 µ V/V)
Basically, if you can convert the calibration coefficient to the rated output mentioned in
“When Rated Input and Rated Output Are Known,” the previous equation can be used.
Using equation 1,
1 µ V/V = 0.001 mV/V = 0.001 × 2000 µ STR = 2 µ STR therefore the rated output with this sensor when 20 mm is input would be
20 mm ÷ [0.003998 mm/2 µ STR] = 10005 µ STR in other words, for 1 mm, an output of:
10005
µ
STR / 20 mm = 500.25
µ
STR/mm can be obtained.
Thereafter in the same manner, if you wish to measure with a scale of 2 mm to 15 mm, the settings are
Scale minimum:
Scale maximum: therefore,
2
15 (Units: mm)
Span minimum:
Span maximum:
2 × 500.25 µ STR/mm = 1000.5 µ STR
15 × 500.25 µ STR = 7503.75 µ STR would be appropriate settings.
Since the measurement range is the 20000 µ STR range, the resolution on the MW100 comes to 1 µ STR, so we round to the following:
Span minimum: 1001 µ STR
Span maximum: 7504
µ
STR
1-34
IM MW100-01E
1.8
Functions of the 10-CH, High-Speed Digital
Input Module
The “-D05” module is equipped with ten inputs for measurement of no-voltage contact, open collector, and 5 V logic inputs at a minimum measurement interval of 10 ms.
The “-D24” module is equipped with ten inputs and measures 24-V logic inputs at a minimum measurement interval of 10 ms.
1
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Measurement Input Types
Measurement Input Type
No measurement
Digital
Measuring Range
DI (MX115-D05)
Measurement Range Type
LEVEL
Contact input
Notation
SKIP
DI
Notation
LEVEL
CONTACT
DI (MX115-D24)
Measurement Range Type
LEVEL
Notation
LEVEL
Rated Measuring Range
OFF at 6 V or less and ON at 16 V or more
Measurement Interval
Select 10 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, or 60 s.
Filters
Rated Measuring Range
OFF at 1 V or less and ON at 3 V or more
100 Ω or less, ON, 100 k Ω or less, OFF
The module detects ON/OFF as shown below to prevent the effects of chattering. If the measurement interval is set a value greater than four times the chattering period, measurement is possible by avoiding chattering effects.
• Measurement interval of 5 s or less: Use the wider of the ON/OFF width of the detection period (approximately 75% to 90% of the measurement interval)
Measurement interval
Measurement interval
Measurement interval
Detection interval
Detection interval
Detection interval
Detection interval =
Measurement interval
×
75% to 90%
Chattering
• Measurement interval of 5 s or more: Use the wider of the ON/OFF width of approximately 4.5 s
IM MW100-01E
1-35
1-36
1.9
Functions of the 8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog
Output Module
The module has eight outputs for voltage or current.
An external power source (24 V) is required for current output.
For voltage output only, an external power source is not required.
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Output Types
Output Type
No output
Analog output
Notation
SKIP
AO
Output Method
Output Method
Transmission Output
Command Output
Notation
TRANS
COM
Actions
Outputs a voltage or current according to the measured results of the input channel specified on the same unit. You can also produce pattern output using the broken line input function.
Outputs specified values based on values sent from the PC.
Output Range
Output Range
Voltage
Current
Notation
10 V
20 mA
Output range
–10.000 V to 10.000 V
0.000 mA to 20.000 mA
Output Update Interval
The output is updated at 100-ms (minimum) intervals. It is not synchronized to the measurement interval.
Operation upon Startup and Errors
See section 1.11, “Operation of the Eight-Channel Medium-Speed Analog Output
Module and the Eight-Channel Medium Speed PWM Output Module.”
Output Operation during Calibration
Calibration Condition Output Operation
Channels being calibrated Command output (output of calibration value)
Non-calibrated channels Holds the output value (holds the value last output during steady operation (see section 1.11))
IM MW100-01E
1.10 Functions of the 8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM
Output Module
This module has eight outputs for pulse wave duty. A certain duty pulse waveform is output according to the specified pulse interval. A pulse interval can be set for each channel.
1
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Output Types
Output Type
No output
PWM Output
Notation
SKIP
PWM
Output Method
Output Method
Transmit
Command output
Notation
TRANS
COM
Actions
Outputs a duty pulse wave according to the measured or computed results of the input channel specified on the same unit. You can also produce pattern output using the broken line input function.
Outputs specified data based on the values sent from the PC.
Output Waveform
Output width
External power supply voltage
Duty=
Output width
Pulse interval
×
100 [%]
Pulse interval
Pulse Interval
1 ms to 300 s (can be set channel by channel)
Range Notation
1 ms interval setting range 1 ms
Setting Range
1 ms to 30.000 s (can be set in units of 1 ms)
10 ms interval setting range 10 ms 10 ms to 300.00 s (can be set in units of 10 ms)
* The pulse interval can be set by determining the pulse interval coefficient.
The pulse interval coefficient is set from 1 to 30000.
Pulse interval = range
×
pulse interval coefficient
Output Update Interval
The output is updated at 100-ms (minimum) intervals. It is not synchronized to the measurement interval.
Output Range
0.000% to 100.000%
Operation upon Startup and Error Occurrence
See section 1.11, “Operation of the 8-CH Medium-Speed Analog Output Module and the
8-CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module.”
IM MW100-01E
1-37
1-38
1.11 Operation of the 8-CH Medium-Speed Analog
Output Module and the 8-CH Medium Speed
PWM Output Module
The following describes the output operation of the analog and PWM output modules.
Output upon Startup and Error Occurrence
Output Selection
Hold previous value
Output preset value
Notation
LAST
PRESET
Output Format
Actions
Holds the last value output.
Outputs an arbitrarily specified output value.
In the output format below, current (analog output module) or pulse wave duty (PWM output module) is output.
• Transmission output: Analog or PWM output occurs according to the measured or computed values from the specified channel of the same unit. All input modules can be specified (but not output modules).
• Command output: When commands are received from the PC, the instrument outputs analog or PWM signals accordingly. Once the power is turned ON and the unit is able to perform communication, command output becomes possible. For transmission output within a unit, after measurement or computation starts, the output values are updated upon transmission output.
Output on Disabled Channels
Type of Disabled Channel
Channels changed from enabled to disabled through setting changes
Channels invalid upon startup
Output
Holds the last output value when channel was active
Output according to settings upon startup
The timing at which changes applied to the output module take effect is according to the events below.
(Ex. When changing settings from transmission output within a unit to command output, the last value of transmission output within a unit is held until the command output request is generated.)
Output Operation per Settings and Setting Changes
Condition upon Power ON and Output Operation
Condition When Power Is Turned ON
When Output Settings are Disabled
With transmission output within a unit, Before meas. start Operation when power is turned ON and reference channels disabled
Start measurement Output upon error occurrences
Transmission output within a unit Before meas start Operation when power is turned ON
Start measurement Transmission output
Command output
Output Operation
Operation when power is turned ON
No output request Operation when power is turned ON
Output requested Command output
IM MW100-01E
1.11 Operation of the 8-CH Medium-Speed Analog Output Module and the 8-CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module
Output Operation through Setting Changes (Common)
Setting Changes (Contents) Output Operation
Setting changes for operation Prev. value held
→
preset value Outputs the preset value the on startup next time the power is turned ON
Preset value → hold prev. value The last output value from the previous operation is held for the next time the power is turned ON (outputs the output value active when the power was last turned OFF during the previous session)
Setting changes for operation Prev. value held → preset value Outputs the preset value the upon error occurrence next time an error occurs
Preset value → hold prev. value Holds the last output value active before the error occurs for the next time an error occurs.
Preset value setting changes
*
Change setting of output ch from Enabled → Disabled
No changes (as above)
Holds the output value (last output value)
* Changes are also applied to inactive channels.
Output Operation through Setting Changes (Individually by Output Setting)
Output Setting Setting Changes (Contents)
Transmission Range setting AO: V ⇔ mA output Within changes
PWM: 1 ms ⇔ 10 ms or interval units
Operation Transmission within units → setting changes command output
Span setting changes
Output Operation
Output value held
(until the next output event)
Command output
Range setting AO: V ⇔ mA changes
PWM: 1 ms ⇔ 10 ms or interval
Operation Command output
→ setting changes transmission within a unit
Output value held
(until the next output event)
When the range settings of a PWM output module are changed, the output value is not held.
1
IM MW100-01E
1-39
1.11 Operation of the 8-CH Medium-Speed Analog Output Module and the 8-CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module
Steady Output Operation
Output Operation When Connected for Communication
Communication Connection Status Output Operation
Normal connection (initial connection after power ON) Operation when power is turned ON
Communications opened successfully Holds the output value (last output value)
(when communications were cut and restored for the 2nd or more time)
Communication disconnected successfully Holds the output value (last output value)
Output Operation during Measurement and When Performing Transmission Output
“Transmission output execution ON” in the table is when the transmission output control is ON.
“Transmission output execution OFF” in the table is when the transmission output control is OFF.
Output Setup
Transmission Meas. stop → Measurement start output within unit
Command output
Status
Measuring
→
Measurement stop
Output Operation
Transmission output start or output value hold
(depending on the transmission output execution on/off status) on: transmission output starts off: output value held
Holds the output value
(last output value)
Measuring Transmission output execution Transmission start off
→
on
Transmission output execution Holds output value on → off (last output value)
Meas. stop → Measurement start
Measuring → Measurement stop
No effect
No effect
Measuring Transmission output execution No effect off → on
Transmission output execution No effect on → off
Output Operation during an Abnormality and after Recovery from the Abnormality
Output Operation during an Abnormality (by Module)
Abnormal Module Display Status
Main module b
*
System errors bF
F0
Dip switches
ROM error
F1
F2
F3
SRAM error
EEPROM error
Battery error
Output Operation
Operation when power is turned ON
Output modules
F4
U0
U1
U2
U3
U4
Ethernet error
Range information error Operation when power is turned ON or
Calibration value error when output value uncertain
Error during calibration Internal communication error occurred, resulting in an error recovery event. If the error recovery time is 10 s or more, output is performed per the operation for
Error in writing the calibration value.
error occurrence, and then output is executed per the operation for power ON.
Unusable modules Operation when power is turned ON or when output value uncertain
Input modules U0
U1
U4
Range information error Operation when errors occur (transmission
Calibration value error between units output only, since the transmission source input channel is illegal)
Unusable modules
* The number corresponding to the error is shown in the .
1-40
IM MW100-01E
1.11 Operation of the 8-CH Medium-Speed Analog Output Module and the 8-CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module
Output Operation during an Abnormality (by Output Setting)
Output Setting Abnormal Status Output Operation
Transmission output within units
Referenced input channels are +Over Outputs a value +5% of the specified span of the output channel
*
Referenced input channels are –Over Outputs a value –5% of the specified span of the output channel
Referenced input channel is illegal
(input module removed)
Operation upon errors
Referenced input channel is set to Skip
Referenced input channel is Invalid
(math error in Differential computation)
Internal communication error Output value held (occurs immediately after an internal communication error, but there is a recovery action
**
)
CPU abnormality
Command output Internal communication error
Operation upon errors
Output value held (occurs upon an internal communication error, but there is a recovery action
**
)
CPU abnormality Operation upon errors
* PWM output may not always reach +5%.
** See “Output Operation after Recovery from an Abnormality.”
Output Operation after Recovery from an Abnormality (by Output Setting)
Output Setting Abnormality Recovery Output Operation
Transmission Referenced input module recovers Operation upon errors → transmission output within units (removed input modules are inserted) output
Referenced input channel changed from Skip to Measurement range
Referenced input channel is restored from Invalid (math error in Differential computation) to normal
Recover after internal communication If the error recovery time is 10 s or error more; operation upon error operation upon power ON →
Transmission output
→
If the error recovery time is within 10 s; operation upon startup → transmission output
CPU abnormality (does not recover) Operation upon errors
Command output Recover after internal communication If the error recovery time is 10 s or error more; operation upon error operation upon power ON
→ command output
*
→
If the error recovery time is within 10 s; operation upon startup
→
command output
*
CPU abnormality (does not recover) Operation upon errors
* Executed by command output from the PC after recovering from the error.
1
IM MW100-01E
1-41
1.12 Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital
Output Module
This module has ten contact signal outputs that are based on alarm output settings and output settings from the PC.
Terminal cover
Output terminal (clamp terminal)
Output Types
The following types (output factors) are available.
Type
Alarm
Notation
ALARM
Command COM
Media MEDIA
Description
Measurement and computation channels
Command DO operation
When the remaining space on the CF card reaches the specified time
Fail
Error
FAIL When an abnormality occurs on the CPU of the MW100 main module
ERROR When an error is detected on the MW100
Output Update Interval
The output is updated at 100-ms intervals. It is not synchronized to the measurement interval.
Relay Excitation State / Hold Operation
You can select whether or not to energize the output relays upon output. The excitation status selection differs depending on the output type.
Excitation Notation Description
Status
Available Output Types
Energize ENERG Energize when relay output is ON ALARM/COM/ERROR/MEDIA
De-energize DE_EN Do not energize when relay output is ON ALARM/COM/FAIL
1-42
Also, when a condition in which alarm output must be cleared arises, you can select whether to turn output relays OFF (Non-hold), or leave them ON until an output clear command (alarm ACK) appears (Hold).
Hold operation Notation Description
Hold ON Maintains relay output even after relay output is cancelled.
Non-Hold OFF Does not maintain relay output when relay output is cancelled
(normal operation).
• When set to non-hold
Output cause occurrencd
ON
Relay output
OFF
• When set to hold
Alarm ACK
Output cause occurrencd
ON
Relay output
OFF
Alarm ACK
100ms
IM MW100-01E
1.12 Functions of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital Output Module
Relay Operation
The following types of relay operation are available.
Operation Description
AND Output ON when all alarms assigned to each alarm output relay activate.
OR Output ON when at least one alarm assigned to each alarm output relay activates.
Reflash Function
The relay operates after the first alarm. If a second alarm activates, the relay restarts after briefly stopping operation.
• The non-operation period is 200 ms.
• Even if a new alarm occurs during the non-operation, the non-operation time is not extended.
• The number of output relays that can be specified for the reflash function is unlimited.
• When selecting relay output other than alarm output relays, the reflash function specification is disabled.
• You can specify the reflash function when OR is selected for the AND/OR function and Non-Hold is selected for the Hold/Non-Hold function.
Alarm1 status
Alarm2 status
Alarm3 status
Reflash function relay status
200ms 200ms
1
IM MW100-01E
1-43
1-44
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
Overview of the MATH Function
You can enter expressions using constants, operators, and functions described below.
The computed results can be displayed and recorded (saved). MATH allows you to determine the average/maximum/minimum of a specified channel on a specified date/ time, or output events (start/stop record, reset time, etc.) under specified conditions.
Number of MATH Channels
Computation can be performed on sixty channels, and 240 channels can be used for communication input. The maximum number of characters that can be used in an expression is 120 for MATH channels and 8 for communication input channels.
MATH Types
The following types of computations can be performed.
• Basic math
• Logical operations
• Relational operations
• Arithmetic functions
• TLOG functions
• CLOG functions
• Conditional expressions
Basic Math
Type
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
-
Operator Example Explanation
+ 001+002 Finds the sum of measured values on channels 001 and
002
∗
002-001 Finds the difference in the measured values of channels
001 and 002.
003 ∗ K01 Multiplies the measured data on channel 003 by constant K01
Division
Exponentiation
/
∗∗
004/K02 Divides the measured data on channel 004 by constant
K02
005 ∗∗ 006 Raises the measured data of channel 005 to the power of the measured data of channel 006.
Logical Operations
Type
Logical sum
Exclusive OR
Operator Example
Logical product AND
OR
XOR
Logical negation NOT
001AND002
Explanation
When channel 001 = 0 and channel 002 = 0, 0
When channel 001 ≠ 0 and channel 002 = 0, 0
When channel 001 = 0 and channel 002 ≠ 0, 0
When channels 001 and 002 ≠ 0, 1
001OR002 When channel 001 = 0 and channel 002 = 0, 0
When channel 001 ≠ 0 and channel 002 = 0, 1
When channel 001 = 0 and channel 002 ≠ 0, 1
When channels 001 and 002
≠
0, 1
001XOR002 When channel 001 = 0 and channel 002 = 0, 0
When channel 001
≠
0 and channel 002 = 0, 1
When channel 001 = 0 and channel 002
≠
0, 1
When channels 001 and 002
≠
0, 0
NOT001 When channel 001 = 0, 1
When channel 001
≠
0, 0
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
Relational Operations
Type
Equal
Not equal
Greater than
Less than
Greater than or equal to
Less than or equal to
Operators Example
.EQ.
.NE.
001.EQ.002
Explanation
When channel 001 = channel 002, 1
When channel 001
≠
channel 002, 0
002.NE.001
When channel 001 ≠ channel 002, 1
When channel 001 = channel 002, 0
.GT.
.LT.
.GE.
.LE.
003.GT.K01
When channel 003 > constant K01, 1
When channel 003 ≤ constant K01, 0
004.LT.K10
When channel 004 < constant K10, 1
When channel 004 ≥ constant K10, 0
003.GE.K01
When channel 003 ≥ constant K01, 1
When channel 003 < constant K01, 0
004.LE.K10
When channel 004 ≤ constant K10, 1
When channel 004 > constant K10, 0
Arithmetic Functions
Type
Absolute value
Square root
Operators Example Explanation
ABS() ABS(001) Finds abs val of measured values on ch 001.
Common logarithm LOG()
Exponent
SQR()
EXP()
SQR(002) Finds sqr rt of measured values on ch 002.
LOG(003) Finds common log of measured data on ch 003.
EXP(005) Finds e x
where x is the measured data on ch 005.
TLOG Functions*
The TLOG computation computes the maximum, minimum, maximum-minimum, integral, average, and pulse integral of the specified channel. One function can be used per expression.
Type Operators Example Explanation
Maximum value TLOG.MAX() TLOG.MAX(001) Finds max value of measured values on ch 001.
Minimum value TLOG.MIN() TLOG.MIN(002) Finds min value of measured values on ch 002.
Maximum value TLOG.P-P() TLOG.P-P(003) Finds P-P of the measured data on ch 003.
to minimum value
Integral value
Mean value
TLOG.SUM() TLOG.SUM(004) Finds integral val of measured values on ch 004.
TLOG.AVE() TLOG.AVE(005) Finds the avg value of measured values on ch
005.
Pulse Integration** TLOG.PSUM() TLOG.PSUM(011) Finds the pulse integral of measured values on ch 011.
* The channels that can be specified in TLOG functions are the measurement and MATH channels excluding TLOG.PSUM.
** The channels that can be specified for a TLOG.PSUM computation are the digital input channels.
CLOG Functions*
The CLOG computation computes the maximum, minimum, maximum-minimum, integral, and average values of the specified channel group. One function can be used per expression.
Type Operators Example Explanation
Maximum value CLOG.MAX() CLOG.MAX(001-010) Finds max of measured data on ch 001 to 010.
Minimum value CLOG.MIN() CLOG.MIN(001.003) Finds min of measured data on ch 001 and 003.
Maximum value CLOG.P-P() CLOG.P-P(002-009) Finds P-P of the measured data on ch to minimum value 002 to 009.
Mean. value CLOG.AVE() CLOG.AVE(011-020) Finds avg of measured data on ch 011 to 020.
* The channels that can be specified in CLOG functions are the measurement and MATH channels. (The number of channels which can be specified is to ten channels.)
1-45
1
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
Conditional Expressions
Type Operators Explanation
Conditional expressions [EXPR1?EXPR2:EXPR3] Execute expression 2 when expression 1 is true, or expression 3 when it is false
Other
Type
Parentheses
Operator
( )
Explanation
Specifies the order of operations
Order of Operations in Expressions
Expressions are hierarchical according to the table below. The operations are listed in the table from top to bottom in order of precedence. These precedences must be taken into account when writing expressions.
Operators Type
(High precedence)
Arithmetic, TLOG, and CLOG functions
Conditional expressions
Exponentiation
Logical negation
Multiplication and division
Addition and subtraction
Relational operation
Equivalence
Logical product
Logical sum, exclusive OR
(Low precedence)
ABS(), SQR(), LOG(), EXP(), TLOG.MAX(),
TLOG.MIN(), TLOG.P-P(), TLOG.SUM(),
TLOG.AVE(), TLOG.PSUM()
CLOG.MAX(), CLOG.MIN(), CLOG.P-P(),
CLOG.AVE()
[EXPR1?EXPR2:EXPR3]
∗∗
NOT
∗ , /
+, –
.GT., .LT., .GE., .LE.
.EQ., .NE.
AND
OR, XOR
MATH Reference Channels
The following channels can be referenced for data used in computations.
Type
Measurement Channel
Computation channels
Channel number Description
001 to 060 Data from measurement channels
A001 to A300
Communication input channels C001 to C300
Data from MATH channels
(Channels A061 to A300 are used for communication input only.)
Numerical values in expressions substituted with communication input
Flag input channels
Calculation constant
Program channels
F01 to F60
K01 to K60
P01 to P03
Set in expressions as the constant 1 or 0
Represented as a fixed constant in expressions
Inputs broken line data into expressions
Flag Input Channels
Can be set in expressions as the constant 1 or 0. Normally 0, but turns to 1 upon occurrence of certain events of the Event/Action function.
For example, given the expression:
NOTF01 ∗ TLOG.SUM(001) if the Event action’s Edge action is set to FLAG:F01, when the event occurs, F01 becomes 1 and NOTF01 becomes 0, therefore the total of channel 001 is 0.
1-46
IM MW100-01E
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
Program Channels
Up to thirty-two inputs of broken line data can be included in expressions.
Multiple points can be set for the time from the start point and the output value at that point. Specified points are linked with a straight line, the value of Y at the elapsed time X is output. There is SINGLE, in which one cycle is executed, and REPEAT in which execution repeats. By specifying a MATH channel to which broken line input is assigned to the reference channel of an analog output channel, you can output arbitrary patterns.
• Example
Y : Output
(30.800) (40.800)
(10.500)
(20.500)
1
(0.0)
(50.0)
X : Elapsed time(s)
• Entry Example
Input of broken line data in the example is as follows.
(0.0), (10.500), (20.500), (30.800), (40.800), (50.0), (-1.0)
If there are fewer than thirty-two setting points, a (-1.0) is required to show the end of the points.
• Operation of program channels for the computation operation
Computation Operation Program channel operation
Computation start
Computation stop
Computation clear
Starts broken line computation from the held elapsed time
Holds the broken line computed value
Computation reset
0-clear the elapsed time and start the broken line computation from the beginning
During self-computation, 0-clear the elapsed time and start the broken line computation
• Operation after Elapsed Time
Mode
Single
Repeat
Notation
SINGLE
REPEAT
Program channel operation
Holds the broken line computed value of the last point
Returns to the start point then repeats broken line
Computation Operation
Starting and Stopping Computation
Execution of computation starts and stops according to user commands (Start/Stop key,
Event/Action function, or monitor screen settings).
IM MW100-01E
Computed Values Clear
Clears all MATH channel data (including MATH alarms) per the Event/Action function, communication commands, or requests from the monitor setting screen.
Computed Value Reset
Clears all MATH channel data (including MATH alarms) per the Event/Action function, communication commands, or requests from the monitor setting screen. If this request occurs during a computation, it is executed on the next computation interval and computation starts. Also, if the request occurs while the computation operation is stopped, it is cleared when computation starts.
1-47
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
Group Reset
Clears all MATH channel data (including MATH alarms) per the Event/Action function or requests from communication commands. If this request occurs during a computation, it is executed on the next computation interval and computation starts. Also, if the request occurs while computation is stopped, it is cleared when computation starts.
Math Groups
Specifies multiple channels from among Math channels 1 through 60. Up to seven groups can be set. Math groups are used with group reset.
Math Interval
Specify one from among the measurement group numbers, and perform computation.
Select a group having a measurement interval of 100 ms or higher.
The following conditions apply to the specified measurement group.
• In the selected measurement group, all measurement channels must include an input module with no SKIP channels.
• If there is no input module, or if all channels of the input module are SKIP, you can specify measurement group arbitrarily.
• When multiple measurement groups specify the same measurement interval, specify the measurement group with the largest number.
Math Span
The upper and lower limits for the display of the monitor screen and other items. The specifiable range of numbers is as follows according to the decimal place. If the computed results fall outside of the allowable numerical value setting range, they are displayed on screen as plus over or minus over data.
1
2
3
4
Decimal Place
0
Computation span setting range
–9999999 to 99999999
–999999.9 to 9999999.9
–99999.99 to 999999.99
–9999.999 to 99999.999
–999.9999 to 9999.9999
Handling Units in Computations
In computations, computed values (measured and computed data) are handled as numbers without units. Also, they are unrelated to the math channel units.
Example:
Expression = 001 + 002 + K01
001 (measurement ch 1) = 20 mV, 002 (measurement ch 2) = 30 V, K01 (math constant)
= 10
Given the above, the computed result is 60.
TLOG.PSUM Settings
When performing pulse integration at an interval of 10 ms or 50 ms, an input module of
100 ms interval or higher is required in addition to a module enabled for DI input for
TLOG.PSUM computation. Also, set the MATH interval to 100 ms or higher.
Alarm Level
You can implement alarm actions based on the computed result. Four levels can be set per channel. Available alarm types are upper limit and lower limit. There is no hysteresis function.
1-48
IM MW100-01E
1.13 MATH Function (/M1 Option)
Math Error Data Processing
Processing of measurement channels referenced in expressions and data referenced in math channels is as follows. Note that error data, plus over data, and minus over data can be processed using special MATH items.
Processing upon Math Error
When the computation results in an error, the following choices are available.
Choice for the Computed Result
Set to plus over
Set to minus over
Notation
+OVER
–OVER
Special Math Processing
You can select from the following special math processes for the MATH operation when the reference channel results in an error.
Reference channel
Channel referenced in expression is error data
Channel referenced in
Choice for the Computed Result
Set to computation error
Ignored and continue computation
Set to computation error
Notation
ERROR
SKIP
ERROR expression is overflow data Ignored and continue computation SKIP
Replace data with upper or lower limit and LIMIT continue computation
TLOG.MAX, TLOG.MIN, Plus over
Channel referenced in the Minus over
TLOG.P-P expression is overflow data
+OVER
–OVER
CLOG.MAX, CLOG.MIN, Calculation Error
Channel referenced in the
CLOG.P-P expression is overflow data
The upper and lower limits are as follows:
• Measurement channels: Range upper and lower limit
• Linear-scaled measurement channels: Upper and lower limit of scaling
• Computation channels: Upper/lower limit of span
ERROR
Overflow Processing upon TLOG.PSUM Computation Overflow
You can select an integral value process for when the TLOG.PSUM integral value overflows from the following items.
Choice for the Computed Result
When 99999999 is exceeded, computation stops as an overflow
Notation
OVER
When 99999999 is exceeded, the next count is 0, and computation continues.
ROTATE
TLOG.SUM Computation Integration Units
The units of integration are as follows:
IIntegration Units Notation Explanation
No time scale
Every second
Every minute
Every hour
OFF
SEC
MIN
HOUR
Σ (data)*
Σ (data)/(Number of times of computing per second.)
Σ (data)/(Number of times of computing per minute.)
Σ (data)/(Number of times of computing per hour.)
* Integration of data every MATH integral number of times
1
IM MW100-01E
1-49
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
2.1
Handling Precautions
This section describes the precautions to be taken when using the MW100. Please read before using this product.
• If you are using this instrument for the first time, make sure to thoroughly read the safety precautions given on pages ii and iii.
• Do not remove the case.
For internal inspection or adjustment, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
• Do not place objects on top of the instrument.
Never place other instruments or objects containing water on top of the instrument.
Doing so can lead to malfunction.
• Take proper care when carrying the instrument.
First, turn off the DUT and the MW100 and remove all cables including measurement wires and communication cables. Then, remove the power cord from the outlet.
• To prevent internal overheating, do not obstruct the vent holes of the modules.
• This instrument uses many plastic parts. When cleaning, wipe using a dry soft cloth.
Do not use volatile chemicals since this might cause discoloring and deformation.
Doing so can cause discoloring or deformation.
• Do not bring charged objects near the signal terminals. Doing so can lead to malfunction.
• Do not pour volatile agents on the MW100 or leave it in contact with rubber or PVC products for an extended time. Doing so can lead to malfunction.
• Do not apply shock to the instrument.
• When not in use, make sure to turn OFF the power.
• If there are any symptoms of trouble such as smoke, strange orders, or strange sounds coming from the instrument, immediately turn OFF the power and shut off the power supply. Contact your dealer immediately.
• Handle the power cord correctly.
Nothing should be placed on top of the power cord. The power cord should also be kept away from any heat sources. When unplugging the power cord from the outlet, never pull by the cord itself. Always hold and pull by the plug. If the cord is damaged, contact your dealer for replacement. When ordering, see page vi for the power cord part number.
2
2-1
IM MW100-01E
2.2
Installation
2-2
Installation Location
Install the instrument indoors in the following locations.
• In temperatures of –20 to 60
°
C
If the ambient temperature is –20 to 40 ° C, place the instrument in a location where the humidity is 20 to 80% RH. For 40 to 50 ° C, the humidity should be 10 to 50%. For
50 to 60 ° C, the humidity should be 5 to 30%. However, no condensation should be present. Also note that the temperature range of certain modules is –20 to 50 ° C.
Note
Condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where the ambient temperature is higher, or if the temperature changes rapidly. Measurement errors can occur when using thermocouple input. In this case, let the instrument adjust to the new environment for at least one hour before using the instrument.
• Locations where the operating altitude is 2,000 m or less
• Well-ventilated locations
Install the instrument in a well-ventilated location to prevent the temperature inside the instrument from rising.
• Location where mechanical vibration is small
Select a location with small mechanical vibration for installation.
• Horizontal location
Install the instrument on a flat, even surface.
Do not install the instrument in the following places.
• Dangerous locations where flammable liquids, vapors, or dust is present
• In direct sunlight or near heat appliances
Select a location with the smallest fluctuation from room temperature (23 ° C) as possible. Placing the instrument in direct sunlight or near heat appliances can cause adverse effects.
• Where an excessive amount of soot, steam, humidity, dust, or corrosive gas is present
Soot, steam, humidity, dust, and corrosive gas can cause adverse effects on the instrument. Avoid installing the instrument in an environment with a high level of such substances.
• Near magnetic field sources
Install the instrument in a location where the magnetic field is 400 A/m or less. Avoid bringing instruments that produce magnetic fields or magnets near this instrument.
Using the instrument near a strong magnetic field source can cause measurement errors.
Installation Procedures
CAUTION
When attaching the instrument to DIN rails, use metal plates at least 2 mm thick in three places to secure the unit and prevent it from falling.
The MW100 Data Acquisition Unit can be used on the desktop, placed on a floor, rack mounted, or panel mounted. In all cases, be sure to install the instrument in a vertical position.
IM MW100-01E
2.2 Installation
Placing on a Desktop or on the Floor
Since each module has feet you can attach the necessary modules to the base plate allowing the unit to be placed vertically. For the procedure for attaching the modules, see the next page.
2
Feet
Functional ground terminal screw
Attaching to DIN Rails
By attaching DIN rail mounting brackets to the base plate as in the figure below, you can rack-mount or panel-mount the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.
• Attachment of the DIN rail mount bracket to
the base plate
• Attachment of the base plate to the DIN rail
Base plate
Base plate
Latch lever
(press to release from the DIN rail)
Screw holes
Attachment screws (M3)
DIN rail mount bracket
DIN rail mount bracket
• Dimensions when mounted on a DIN rail
* To prevent slacks in the DIN rail, fix at least three locations of the DIN rail.
455 (1 main module, for connecting six input/output modules)
105
DIN rail*
Unit: mm
158.6
DIN rail mount bracket
DIN rail
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
151.1
163
IM MW100-01E
2-3
2.3
Attaching the Modules
WARNING
To prevent electric shock and instrument breakdown, do not connect the power supply to the main module when attaching modules.
Preparing the Base Plate
The accessory brackets are attached in order to attach the MW100 main module to the base plate.
Remove the base block blacket
Attach the bracket that came with the MW100
2-4
Attachment Procedure
1. Check that the power supply is not connected to the main module.
2. Align the connector on the rear panel of the module to the connector at the desired position of the base plate and insert the connector.
When the connectors are correctly connected, the guide pin on the rear panel of the module is inserted into the guide hole on the base plate. In addition, the module is secured to the base plate with the latch lever locking in place at the bottom section of the base plate.
3. Fasten with two screws (M3) at the top of the main module, and one screw at the top of the input/output modules. The main module can only be attached to the right side of the base plate.
To remove the module, loosen the attachment screw, pull down on the latch lever on the rear panel of the module, and pull the module straight from the base plate.
Base plate connector cover*
(accessory sold separately)
* Can be attached by hooking the top section of the cover to the top edge of the base plate and pressing down on the lower section of the cover.
Base plate
Module connector
Guide holes
Screw holes
Guide pins
Main module
Module attachment screw
Latch lever
(pull up to remove the module from the base plate)
Base plate
Input/Output module
IM MW100-01E
2.3 Attaching the Modules
Attachment Positions and Channel Numbers
Channel numbers are recognized as follows:
• Browser monitor and commands
Channel numbers within units. Example: CH001
• Data Viewer software
Unit number + Channel number within units. Example: CH01001
Representation of channel numbers:
Channel numbers in a unit (001-060)
Unit number (00-89)
5 4 3 2 1 0 Slot number
MW100
2
041-050
051-060
021-030
031-040
001-010
011-020
Channel number in the unit**
** The last one digit on a 4-channel module is 1 to 4.
The last one digit on a 6-channel module is 1 to 6.
The last one digit on a 8-channel module is 1 to 8.
IM MW100-01E
2-5
2.4
Connecting Signal Wires
Terminal Arrangement Markings on the Terminal Cover
Characters indicating the terminal function and a terminal symbol indicating the type of signal to be input/output to each terminal are written on the back of the terminal cover of each I/O module. For information on wiring of corresponding terminal signals, see the wiring procedures in this section. The 4-CH Medium-Speed Strain Module (-NDI) does not have a terminal cover.
4-CH, High-Speed
Universal Input Module
10-CH, Medium-Speed
Universal Input Module
6-CH, Medium-Speed
4-wire RTD Resistance
Input Module
4-CH, Medium-Speed
Strain Input Module
(-B12, -B35)
Terminal cover
100Vpk MAX TO
250V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
Terminal symbol
Channel number within module
100Vpk MAX TO
120V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
10-CH, High-Speed
Digital Input Module
(-D05, -D24)
8-CH, Medium-Speed
Analog Output Module
8-CH, Medium-Speed
PWM Output Module
10-CH, Medium-Speed
Digital Output Module
-D05
10Vpk MAX TO
250V MAX TO
250V MAX NO TO C
250V MAX CH TO CH
250V MAX TO
2-6
Attaching and Removing the Terminal Block
The I/O terminals can be removed as shown in the figure below.
Also, when the terminal cover is flipped up, you can remove it by forcing it back.
4-CH, High-Speed Universal
Input Module
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain
Input Module (-B12, -B35)
Pull-out handle
The terminal block can be attached and detached.
The terminal plate can be attached and detached.
Attachment screw
(Loosen before removing the terminal plate.)
IM MW100-01E
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module/
6-CH, Medium-Speed 4-wire RTD Resistance
Input Module/
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module
(-D05, -D24)
8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog
Output Module/
8-CH, PWM Output Module/
10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital
Output Module
2
Pull-out handle
The terminal plate can be attached and detached.
Attachment screw
(Loosen before removing the terminal plate.)
The terminal block can be attached and detached
(fixed with screws).
Attaching the Screw Terminal Plate
A screw terminal plate (model 772080, sold separately) can be attached to the 10-CH
Medium Speed Universal Input Module and the 10-CH High Speed Digital Input Module.
The screw terminal plate is attached and removed in the same manner as the screw terminal block. Note that the terminal arrangement is different than that of the clamp terminal plate. The proper arrangement is shown on the back of the terminal covers, so be sure to replace the cover along with the terminal plate. For details, see “Handling the
MX100/MW100 10-CH Screw Terminal Plate” in IM MX100-77E.
Screw terminal plate
Attachment screw
Screw Terminal Block
The 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input modules and 10-CH, High-Speed Digital
Input modules allow you to remove the terminal plate and connect a 10-channel screw terminal block (accessory sold separately, M4 screws) that can be attached to a DIN rail
(see the figure below).
10-CH screw terminal block (772061)
CH 7
CH
8
CH
9
CH 4
CH
5
CH
6
CH 10
CH
1
b B A
CH
2
CH
3
10-CH screw terminal block (772061)
Attachment screw for connector cover
Attachment screw
Connector cover b
Terminal cover -/B
+/A
Connection cable between the input module and screw terminal block
(772062-0XXX*)
* Length: 050 or 100 cm.
Attachment screw
Loosen the attachment screw for the connector cover and open the connector cover.
10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module/
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module
Attachment to a DIN Rail
DIN rail
Latch lever
(Pull down to detach.)
IM MW100-01E
2-7
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
General Precautions When Wiring the Input/Output Signal Wires
WARNING
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring, confirm that the power supply source and signal source are turned OFF. After making the connections, secure the terminal cover and do not touch the terminals with your hands.
• For signal wires on which voltage exceeding 30 VAC / 60 VDC is applied relative to the ground potential or between signals, use reinforced (double) insulation wires. For all other signal wires, use basic insulation wires. For the withstand voltage of insulation wires, see the table below.
Applied Voltage (Vrms or VDC) Basic Insulation Double (reinforced) insulation
30(60VDC) to 100 620 Vrms 1000 Vrms
101 to 150
151 to 300
301 to 600
840 Vrms
1390 Vrms
2210 Vrms
1400 Vrms
2300 Vrms
3700 Vrms
• To avoid electric shock when removing the terminal plate or block and wiring the terminals, attach the terminal block or plate to the input output module before inputting or outputting signals. Electric shock or fire can result if signals are applied to the terminals if the terminal block is removed from the input/output modules.
• When wiring to the screw terminal plate or screw terminal block, use round, insulation coated crimp-on lugs on the terminals (for 4-mm screws on the screw terminal block, or 3-mm screws on the screw terminal plate) that do not come out when loose.
• To prevent fire, use signal wires of the following temperature ratings.
Module Type Temp. Rating
Screw terminal
Analog output module, PWM output module signal wires
75 ° C
85 ° C
Universal input module, digital input module, digital output module, 80 ° C
4-wire RTD resistance input/output module, strain input module
2-8
CAUTION
• If a large pulling force is applied to the input/output signal wires connected to the
MW100, the terminal or signal wire may break. To prevent this from happening, secure all the wiring cables to the installation panel.
• Wiring of the Strain Input Module (-NDI)
When connecting a bridge head, in order that the empty weight of the cable does not exceed 5 kg, ensure that the cable does not hang down more than 1.5
m (the distance to the floor). If the cable hangs longer than 1.5 m, secure the cable to the installation panel or some other location.
• Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input terminals of the universal input modules. Doing so can damage the modules.
• Maximum input voltage
Voltage range less than or equal to 1 VDC, TC, RTD, and DI: ± 10 VDC
Other voltage ranges: ± 120 VDC
• Maximum common mode voltage: 600 VACrms (50 / 60 Hz)
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
• Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input terminals of the 10-CH High-Speed Digital Input Module and the output terminals of the 10-CH Medium-Speed Digital Output Module. Doing so can damage the modules.
• Maximum input voltage
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input module: ± 10 VDC (-D05), ± 50 VDC (-D24)
10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital Output module: 250 VAC or 250 VDC
• Maximum common mode voltage: 250 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
• Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input terminals of the 4-Wire RTD resistance input module. Doing so can damage the modules.
• Maximum input voltage
Voltage range less than or equal to 1 VDC, RTD, resistance, and DI (contact):
± 10 VDC
Other measuring ranges: ± 120 VDC
• Maximum common mode voltage: 600 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
• Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input terminals of the strain input modules. Doing so can damage the modules.
• Maximum input voltage: ± 10 VDC (between H-L) continuous
• Maximum common-mode voltage
Between input and ground: 250 VACrms (-B12, -B35), 30 VACrms (-NDI)
• Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input terminals of the analog output modules or the PWM output modules. Doing so can damage the modules.
• Maximum common-mode voltage
Between output terminals and earth terminal: 250 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
• This is a measurement category II (IEC61010-1) and overvoltage category II
(CSA1N.61010-1) instrument.
Consider the points indicated below to prevent noise from entering the measurement circuit. For information about measures against noise, see section
2.10, “Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.”
• Keep the measurement circuit away from the power supply cable (power supply circuit) and ground circuit.
• It is desirable that the object under measurement is not a noise source. However, if this is not avoidable, insulate the object under measurement and the measurement circuit. In addition, ground the object under measurement.
• Shielded wires are effective against noise caused by electrostatic induction. As necessary, connect the shield to the ground terminal of the MW100 (make sure this does not lead to grounding at two points).
• Twisting the measurement circuit wires at short intervals is relatively effective against noise caused by electromagnetic induction.
• The protective earth ground must be connected to low ground resistance (100 Ω or less).
When using the reference junction compensation of the MW100 through thermocouple input, take measures to stabilize the temperature at the terminal section.
• Always close and secure the terminal cover.
• Do not use thick wires with high heat radiation effect (cross-sectional area of 0.5
mm
2
or smaller recommended).
• Keep the ambient temperature consistent. Large temperature fluctuation occurs such as when a fan nearby is turned ON/OFF.
Connecting the input wires in parallel with other instruments may mutually affect the measured values. If you need to make a parallel connection:
• Turn OFF burnout.
• Ground each instrument at a single common point.
• Do not turn ON/OFF the instrument while measurement is in progress. It may cause adverse affects on the other instrument.
Note that RTDs and resistors cannot be connected in parallel.
2-9
2
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
Wiring Procedures
1. Turn OFF the power to the instrument.
2. Loosen the terminal cover attachment screw and lift up the terminal cover.
3. Connect the signal wires to the terminals.
4. Return the terminal cover to the original position and secure it with the screw.
4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module
Attachment screw for terminal cover
Terminal cover
Input terminal (clamp terminal)
Wiring the Universal Input Module
• Thermocouple input • RTD input
A
B b
Compensation lead
• DC voltage input/DI input (contact)
A
B b
+ or
–
DC voltage input
Contact
A
A
B
B b b
Lead wire resistance per wire of
10
Ω
or less*. Make the resistance of the three wires equal.
* In the case of Pt100
Ω
. 5
Ω
max for Pt50
Ω
. 1
Ω
max. for Cu10
Ω
.
• DC current input
A
B b
+
DC current input
–
Shunt resistor
Example: For 4 to 20 mA input, shut resistance values should be 250
Ω±
0.1%.
Terminal type:
Applicable wire size:
Clamp
For -H04, 0.2 to2.5 mm
2
(AWG24 to12)
For -M10, 0.14 to 1.5 mm
2
(AWG26 to 16)
Note
• With the 10-CH Medium-Speed Universal Input module, the A and B RTD input terminals are insulated on each channel, but terminal b is shorted internally on all channels.
• When the screw terminal plate (model 772080) is connected to the 10-CH Medium-Speed
Universal Input Module, the terminal arrangement differs from that of clamp terminals, so wire according to the markings on the terminal cover.
2-10
IM MW100-01E
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
Wiring the 4-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module
• DC voltage input/DI (contact) input • RTD input, resistance input
I
A
Votage
+
I
A
Resistance, RTD
B
C
DC voltage
Input
Contact
Nothing connected to the I or C terminal
• DC current input
I
A
B
C
B
C
Resistance per lead wire of 10
+
DC current input
–
Shunt resistor
Example: For 4 to 20 mA input, shut resistance values
should be 250
Ω±
0.1%.
Ω
or less
Terminal type:
Applicable wire size:
Clamp
0.14 to 1.5 mm
2
(AWG26 to 16)
Wiring the Strain Input Module
• 1 Gauge Method
R
R e
R
Rg
E
Rg wire
Rg: resistance value of strain gauge e: output voltage from bridge
E: voltage applied to bridge
-NDI
-B12, -B35
Jumper setting switch
A(+V)
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
Rg
B( L)
C(-V)
D( H)
OFF
ON
No.1
ON
No.2
ON
No.3
ON
No.4
OFF
No.5
OFF
• 1 Gauge 3 Wire Method
R r
R
Rg
R r e
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
Bridge head (319300) r
E r: resistance value of lead wire
Rg: resistance value of strain gauge e: output voltage from bridge
E: voltage applied to bridge
IM MW100-01E
2-11
2
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
-B12, -B35
Jumper setting switch
A(+V)
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
Rg
C(-V)
D( H)
OFF
ON
No.1
ON
No.2
ON
No.3
OFF
No.4
ON
No.5
OFF
• Adjacent 2 Gauge Method
B(L)
-NDI
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
Bridge head (319300)
2-12
R
R
Rg2 e
Rg1
Rg2
Rg1
E
-B12, -B35
Jumper setting switch
Rg1
A(+V)
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
Rg2
C(-V)
D( H)
OFF
ON
No.1
ON
No.2
ON
No.3
OFF
No.4
OFF
No.5
ON
B(L)
• Opposing 2 Gauge Method
R
Rg2 e
Rg1
E
R
Rg1
Rg2
-NDI r: resistance value of lead wire
Rg: resistance value of strain gauge e: output voltage from bridge
E: voltage applied to bridge
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
Rg1 Rg2
Bridge head (319300) r: resistance value of lead wire
Rg: resistance value of strain gauge e: output voltage from bridge
E: voltage applied to bridge
-B12, -B35
Jumper setting switch
Rg1 A(+V)
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
B( L)
C(-V)
Rg2
D( H)
OFF
ON
No.1
ON
No.2
OFF
No.3
ON
No.4
OFF
No.5
ON
-NDI
319300 dose not support the opposing 2-gauge method.
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
• Opposing 2 Gauge 3 Wire Method
r
R r r r
Rg2 e
Rg1 r
R r
E
-B12, -B35
Cannot be connected. Use -NDI.
-NDI
Rg2
Rg1
Rg2 r: resistance value of lead wire
Rg: resistance value of strain gauge e: output voltage from bridge
E: voltage applied to bridge
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
Bridge head (319300)
Rg1
• 4 Gauge Method
Rg4
Rg1
Rg3
Rg2 e
E r: resistance value of lead wire
Rg: resistance value of strain gauge e: output voltage from bridge
E: voltage applied to bridge
Rg1, Rg3
Rg2
Rg2, Rg4
Rg1
Rg1
Rg3
Rg3
Rg4 Rg1, Rg2
Rg3, Rg4
-B12, -B35
Jumper setting switch
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
Rg4
OFF
ON
No.1
OFF
No.2
OFF
No.3
OFF
No.4
OFF
No.5
ON
A(+V)
Rg1
B( L)
Rg2
C(-V)
Rg3
D( H)
-NDI
Rg4 Rg3
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
Rg1
Rg2
Bridge head (319300)
2
2-13
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
Wiring Digital Input Modules
Note
• With digital input modules, the (–) terminal and open terminals on all channels are shorted internally.
• When the screw terminal plate (model 772080) is connected to the Digital Input Module, the terminal arrangement differs from that of clamp terminals, so wire according to the markings on the terminal cover.
Wiring with the -D05 Option
• Contact input • Transistor input • 5V logic input
5V
Main Input Specifications (-D05)
Input type:
Input format:
DI (non-voltage contact, open collector, and 5-V logic)
Pull up at approx. 5 V/approx. 5 k Ω , common potential between channel
Min. detection pulse width:
Twice the sampling interval or more
Input threshold level: No-voltage contact, open collector: 100 Ω or less, ON, 100 k Ω or less, OFF
5-V logic: OFF at 1 V or less and ON at 3 V or greater
Contact/Transistor rating:
Contact with a rating of 15 VDC or greater and 30 mA or greater
Transistor with a rating of Vce > 15 VDC and Ic > 30 mA
Terminal type: Clamp
Applicable wire size: 0.14 to 1.5 mm
2
(AWG26 to 16)
Wiring with the -D24 Option
• 24 V logic input
24V
Main Input Specifications (-D24)
Input type:
Input format:
DI (24-V logic)
Common potential between channel
Min. detection pulse width: Twice the sampling interval or more
Input threshold level: 24-V logic: OFF at 6 V or less and ON at 16 V or greater
Terminal type: Clamp
Applicable wire size: 0.14 to 1.5 mm
2
(AWG26 to 16)
2-14
IM MW100-01E
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
Wiring with the Analog Output Module
External power supply
Vext
+ 24 V power supply
Voltage
V+
(when using current output)
Load
Current
I+
Load Direction of current
2
CAUTION
Two power supply terminals are connected internally. Therefore, do not connect a separate external power supply to them. Fire can result.
Main Output Specifications
Terminal type: Clamp, attached and removed in units of 4 channels
Load impedance: Voltage 5 k Ω or more
Applicable wire size:
Current 600 Ω or less.
0.08 to 2.5 mm
2
(AWG28 to 12)
Wiring with the PWM Output Module
External power supply
+
4 to 28 V power supply
Pulse width output
V+
Load
CAUTION
Two power supply terminals are connected internally. Therefore, do not connect a separate external power supply to them. Fire can result.
Main Output Specifications
Output capacity: 1A/ch max, however, 4 A or less total for all modules
*, **
Terminal type:
*
Clamp, attached and removed in units of 4 channels
Applicable wire size: 0.08 to 2.5 mm
2
(AWG28 to 12)
A 1A current limit circuit is built in to the output circuit. Once the current limit circuit is ON,
** the circuit continues to operate unless the external power supply is turned OFF.
This module has a built-in fuse. The built-in fuse protects against fires or abnormal emissions of heat due to load shortages or other abnormalities. It does not protect against damage to internal circuits.
IM MW100-01E
2-15
2.4 Connecting Signal Wires
Wiring with the Digital Output Module
NO
C
250 VDC/0.1 A, 250 VAC/2 A, or
30 VDC/2 A (resistance load)
Main Output Specifications
Contact mode: A contact (SPST)
Contact capacity: 250 VDC/0.1 A, 250 VAC/2 A, or 30 VDC/2 A (resistance load)
Terminal type:
Applicable wire size:
Clamp, attached and removed in units of 5 channels
0.08 to 2.5 mm
2
(AWG28 to 12)
Note
Do not connect anything to the empty terminals of the digital output module.
2-16
IM MW100-01E
2.5
Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the
Power Switch ON and OFF
Connections with the Power Cord (Power Supply/Cord Basic Specification Code -1M)
WARNING
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring, confirm that the power supply source is turned OFF.
• To prevent shock or fires, only use the power cord supplied by Yokogawa together with the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.
• Make sure to perform protective earth grounding to prevent electric shock.
Connect the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit power cord into a three-prong electrical outlet with a protective grounding terminal. The AC outlet must be of a three-prong type with a protective earth ground terminal.
Also, do not use the functional ground terminal (see 2.2, “Installation” as a protective ground terminal.
• Do not use an extension cord without protective earth ground. Otherwise, the protection function will be compromised.
Use a power supply that meets the conditions indicated below.
Item Specifications
Rated supply voltage
Supply voltage range used
100 to 240 VACrms
AC power supply, 90 to 250 VACrms
Rated supply voltage frequency 50/60 Hz
Allowable line frequency range 50/60 Hz ± 2%
Maximum power consumption Up to approximately 70 VA maximum when six modules are used
Note
Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC, as this may have adverse effects on the measurement accuracy.
1. Check that the power switch of the main module is OFF.
2. Connect the accessory power cord plug to the power connector of the MW100 Data
Acquisition Unit.
3. (Use the power cord that came with the package.) Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to the outlet that meets the conditions above. The AC outlet must be of a three-prong type with a protective earth ground terminal.
2
3-prong outlet
Power connector
Power switch
Power cord
(included in the package)
2-17
IM MW100-01E
2.5 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF
Wiring the Power Supply Terminal (Power Supply/Cord Basic Specification Code -1W)
WARNING
• Furnish a switch (double-pole type) to separate the unit from the main power supply in the power supply line. Also, include an ON/OFF indicator with the switch as well as a display that acts as a power supply shut down for the instrument.
Switch specifications
Steady state current rating: 3 A or more
Inrush current rating: 100 A or more
Conforms with IEC60947-1 and -3
• Connect a fuse of 2 A to 15 A to the power supply line.
• Do not insert a switch or fuse on the ground line.
Use a power supply that meets the conditions indicated below.
Item Specifications
Rated supply voltage
Supply voltage range used
100-240 VACrms
AC power supply, 90 to 250 VACrms
Rated supply voltage frequency 50/60 Hz
Allowable line frequency range 50/60 Hz ± 2%
Maximum power consumption Up to approximately 70 VA maximum when six modules are used
Note
Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC, as this may have adverse effects on the measurement accuracy.
1. Check that the power supply and the power switch of the main module is OFF.
2. Loosen the screw fixing the power supply terminal cover of the main module in place and open the power supply terminal cover.
3. Connect the power cord and the protective ground cord to the power supply terminals according to the figure below.
Use round crimp-on lugs with isolation sleeves (for 4 mm screws) for the power cord and protective ground cord terminals.
4. Close the power supply terminal cover and secure it with the screw.
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
100
- 2
40V
AC
100 - 240V AC
L N
2-18
Power cord
Power cord
Protective grounding cord
Power supply terminal cover
Protective grounding cord
IM MW100-01E
2.5 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF
Wiring the Power Supply Terminal (Power Supply/Cord Basic Specification -2M or -3W)
When using an AC adapter for the power supply
WARNING
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring, confirm that the power supply source is turned OFF.
• Use the power cord supplied by Yokogawa with the instrument.
• Check that the supply voltage matches the rated voltage of the AC adapter before connecting the power cord.
• During periods of extended non-use, remove the AC adapter’s power cord from the AC outlet.
• Do not use an AC adapter (model:772075) other than the one supplied by
YOKOGAWA.
• Nothing should be placed on top of the AC adapter power cord. The power cord should also be kept away from any heat sources.
• When unplugging the power cord from the outlet, never pull by the cord itself.
Always hold and pull by the plug. If the power cord is damaged, contact your dealer for replacement.
Use a power supply that meets the conditions indicated below.
Item Specifications
Rated supply voltage
Supply voltage range used
100 to 240 VACrms
AC power supply, 90 to 250 VACrms
Rated supply voltage frequency 50/60 Hz
Allowable line frequency range 50/60 Hz ± 2%
Maximum power consumption Up to approximately 70 VA maximum when six modules are used
1. Check that the power supply and the power switch of the main module is OFF.
2. Loosen the screw fixing the power supply terminal cover of the main module in place and open the power supply terminal cover.
3. Connect the plus (red) and minus (black) wires from the AC adapter and the protective ground wire to the power supply terminal as in the figure below.
4. Close the power supply terminal cover and secure it with the screw.
2
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
12 -
28
V D
C
12 - 28V DC
Plus wiring
Minus wiring
Plus wiring
Protective grounding line
Minus wiring
Power supply terminal cover
Protective grounding line
IM MW100-01E
2-19
2.5 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF
When Using a DC Power Supply
WARNING
• To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring, confirm that the power supply source is turned OFF.
• To avoid electric shock or fire, use electric wires having a cross sectional area of
0.3 mm
2
(AWG 22) or more.
1. Check that the power supply and the power switch of the main module is OFF.
2. Loosen the screw fixing the power supply terminal cover of the main module in place and open the power supply terminal cover.
3. Following the wiring diagram (see “When Using an AC Adapter” in this section), wire the plus/minus wires from the DC power supply and the protective grounding wire to the power supply terminal.
4. Close the power supply terminal cover and secure it with the screw.
Use a power supply that meets the conditions indicated below.
Item Specifications
Rated supply voltage
Supply voltage range used
12 to 28 VDC
DC power supply: 10 to 32 VDC
Maximum power consumption Up to approximately 35 VA maximum when six modules are used
Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF
Pressing the “I” side of the power switch turns the instrument ON. Pressing the “O” side turns the instrument OFF.
When turned ON, the 7-segment LED (see section 1.3, “Functions of the Main Module” illuminates. When the self check and other processes are complete, the unit number is displayed.
Note
• Before turning the power ON, check that the modules are attached correctly and that the power cord is connected correctly.
• If the 7-segment LED does not illuminate even if the power switch is turned ON, turn OFF the power switch, then check the items below. If the condition does not change when turning ON the power even after checking those items, it is probably a malfunction.
Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
• That the power cord is plugged in properly.
• That the power supply voltage is within the allowable voltage range specified in this section
• If the 7-segment LED displays something other than a unit number when the power switch is turned ON, see section 4.1, “Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective
Actions” and carry out the specified corrective action. If the displayed information does not change even when you carry out the corrective action, it is probably a malfunction.
Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
2-20
IM MW100-01E
2.6
Connecting the Ethernet Cable
Connection Procedure
Connector
Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the main module.
Connection to the PC
Make the connection via a hub. For a one-to-one connection with a PC, make the connection as shown in the figure below. In the same manner, you can connect multiple
MW100 Data Acquisition Units to a single PC.
PC
2
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit
Hub
LAN cable
MW100
Ethernet port
Checking the Communication Status
You can check the status on the two LEDs at the upper-right and lower-right of the
Ethernet port.
For the LED indications, see section 1.3, “Functions of the Main Module.”
Initializing Settings
Use dip switch 1 on the main module to initialize settings including the IP address assigned to the MW100.
1.
Turn OFF the power to the MW100.
2.
Check that the switch 5 of dip switch 1 on the main module is OFF.
3.
Turn OFF the power to the MW100.
After the 7-segment LED indicates the power ON self check, “bF” is displayed.
4.
Check the status of step 3, then turn the power OFF.
5.
Turn switch 5 of dip switch 1 back ON.
Check that the settings were initialized by using the IP setting software
(accessory).
For information on the indications of the dip switches and the power ON self check, see section 1.3, “Functions of the Main Module.”
2-21
IM MW100-01E
2-22
2.7
Connecting the RS-422A/485 Interface (/C3
Option)
Terminal Wiring and Signal Names
FG SG SDB SDA RDB RDA
SERIAL COMM
FG (Frame Ground)
SG (Signal Ground)
SDB (Send Data B)
SDA (Send Data A)
RDB (Received Data B)
RDA (Received Data A)
Case grounding for the main unit.
The signal ground.
Send data B(+).
Send data A(–).
Received data B(+).
Received data A(–).
Connection Procedure
Cables Used
There are two types of cable, a 4-wire and 2-wire cable. Choose a cable depending on the following conditions.
Cable Used
Characteristic impedance
Capacitance
Twisted pair shielded cable
3
×
24 AWG or more (4-wire), 2
×
24 AWG or more (2-wire)
100
Ω
50 pF/m
Cable length Max 1.2 km*
* The transmission distance of the RS-422A/485 interface is not the direct distance, but rather the total cable length (shielded, twisted pair).
WARNING
To prevent electric shock, confirm that the power supply is turned OFF before making connections.
Connections with Upstream Devices
The following figure shows a connection with an upstream device. If the upstream devices use an RS-232 port, connect through a converter.
Host computer or connected upstream instrument
Connected upstream instrument
Main unit
RS-422A/485 terminals
MW100
RS-422A/485
Host computer
Connected upstream instrument
RS-232
Converter
RS-422A/485
Main unit
RS-422A/485 terminals
MW100
IM MW100-01E
Upstream instrument
SDA( - )
SDB( + )
RDA( - )
RDB( + )
SG
2.7 Connecting the RS-422A/485 Interface (/C3 Option)
Example of a Connection with an Upstream Device
You can connect the MW100 to an upstream device with an RS-232, RS-422A, or
RS485 connection port.
For RS-232, use a converter. Refer to the following table for connections to most converter terminals. For details, see the manual that came with the converter.
RS-422A/485 Port
SDA(–)
SDB(+)
RDA(–)
RDB(+)
SG
FG
Converter
TD(–)
TD(+)
RD(–)
RD(+)
SHIELD
EARTH
4-Wire
In general, a 4-wire connection is used with upstream devices. For a 4-wire connection, the send and receive wires must be crossed.
Termination resistance (externally attached) 120
Ω
1/2 W or more
Main unit
RS-422A/485 terminals
Termination resistance
(built-in: with switch)
(SDA)
(SDB)
(RD A)
(RD B)
(SG)
SD A
SD B
RD A
RD B
SG
FG
(SDA)
(SDB)
(RD A)
(RD B)
(SG)
SD A
SD B
RD A
RD B
SG
FG
(SDA)
(SDB)
(RD A)
(RD B)
(SG)
SD A
SD B
RD A
RD B
SG
FG
Upstream instrument
SDA( - )
SDB( + )
RDA( - )
RDB( + )
SG
#1 #2
Do not connect termination resistance from #1 to #n-1.
#n
(#n
≤
32)
2-Wire
On the RS-422A/485 terminal block, connect signals of the same polarity for sending and receiving, and connect only two wires externally.
Termination resistance (externally attached) 120
Ω
1/2 W or more
Main unit
RS-422A/485 terminals
Termination resistance
(built-in: with switch)
(A)
(B)
(SG)
SD A
SD B
RD A
RD B
SG
FG
(A)
(B)
(SG)
SD A
SD B
RD A
RD B
SG
FG
(A)
(B)
(SG)
SD A
SD B
RD A
RD B
SG
FG
IM MW100-01E
#1 #2 #n
(#n
≤
31)
Do not connect termination resistance from #1 to #n-1.
2-23
2
2.7 Connecting the RS-422A/485 Interface (/C3 Option)
Note
• The noise rejection method differs depending on the conditions of use. In the connection example, the cable shielding is only connected to the ground of the main unit (one-sided grounding). This method is effective for noise rejection during long distance communications and other processes when there is a difference of potential between the grounding of the computer and that of the main unit. If there is no difference in potential between the PC ground and the main unit ground, it may also be effective to connect to the PC ground as well (two-sided ground). There are also cases where it is effective to use two sided grounding with a capacitor connected in series on one side. Consider the above options when taking measures against noise.
• With the 2-wire configuration (Modbus protocol), after the last data is output from the upstream PC, the 485 driver must be set to high impedance before 3.5 characters.
Serial Interface Converter
The following are recommended models of converters.
RA SYSTEMS CORP./MODEL RC-77, LINE EYE/SI-30FA, YOKOGAWA/ML2
CAUTION
Some converters not recommended here have non-insulated FG and SG terminals. When using such converters, do not connect them as shown on the previous page (do not connect anything to the converter’s FG ad SG terminals).
Especially for long-distance situations, potential differences can arise causing damage to instruments or communication abnormalities. Also, if the converter has no SG terminal, use the converter as-is without connecting signal ground.
For details, see the user’s manual for the converter.
2-24
Some converters not recommended here have reversed signal polarity (A/B or +/– markings). When using such converters, be sure to reverse the connections.
For 2-wire configurations, to avoid data collision during sending and receiving, the ON/
OFF state of the converters send driver must be controlled by the connected upstream device. When using a recommended converter, use RS-232 (RTS) to control ON/OFF of the send driver.
When Using Instruments That Only Support RS-422A
For 4-wire configurations, up to thirty-two MW100s can be connected to a single upstream device. However, if at least one of the devices in the system only supports
RS-422A, it may not be possible to connect up to thirty-two units.
When Using Recorders That Only Support Yokogawa RS-422A
The maximum number of units that can be connected in this case is sixteen. Drivers for some conventional Yokogawa recorders (the HR2400, µ R series, and other recorders) only support RS-422A. When such recorders are used, only a maximum of sixteen units can be connected.
Note
In the RS-422A standard, up to ten units can be connected to a single port (in 4-wire configurations).
Termination Resistance
This module has built-in termination resistance. When using multi-drop connections
(including point-to-point connections), for the outermost unit, turn terminator switch ON.
Turn it OFF for units in the middle. Also, turn ON termination resistance for the connected upstream device (see the manual of the upstream device). When using a converter, turn ON its termination resistance. The recommended converters have built-in termination resistance.
IM MW100-01E
2.8
Connecting the RS-232 Interface (/C2 Option)
Connector Pin Assignments and Signal Names
Connector Pin Assignments
1
2
3 4 5
2
6 7 8 9
Signal Names Corresponding to Connector Pins
The following table shows signal names for the RS-232, JIS, and ITU-T standards.
Pin Signal Name
JIS ITU-T RS-232
2 RD
3 SD
104
103
BB (RXD) Receive data
Notation Meaning
Input signal to the instrument
BA (TXD) Transmitted data Output signal from the instrument
5 SG
7 RS
102
105
8 CS 106
AB (GND) Signal ground The signal ground.
CA (RTS) Request to send The handshaking signal when receiving data from the computer, and output signal from the instrument.
CB (CTS) Clear to send The handshaking signal when receiving data from the computer, and input signal to the instrument.
* Pins 1, 4, 6, and 9 are not used.
Handshaking
One of the following four methods in the table below can be selected for the instrument.
Handshaking method
Data Transmission Control
(Control used to send data to a PC)
Software handshaking
Hardware handshaking
Stops
Table of Handshaking Methods ( indicates that it is supported) transmission when X-OFF is received.
Resume when X-ON is received.
Stops transmission when CB (CTS) is false.
No handshaking
Resume when it is true.
(Control used to receive data from a PC)
Software handshaking
Send X-OFF when the
Data Reception Control received data buffer is 3/4th filled. Send
X-ON when the received data buffer becomes
1/4th filled.
Hardware handshaking
Set CA (RTS) to
False when the
No received data buffer handshaking is 3/4th filled. Set to
True when the received data buffer becomes 1/4th filled.
O F F - O F F
X O N - X O N
X O N - R S
C S - R S
OFF-OFF
• Send Data Control
Handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer. “X-OFF” and “X-ON” from the computer are treated as data, and CS is ignored.
• Receive Data Control
Handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer. When the receive buffer of the instrument becomes full, data thereafter is discarded.
RS = True (fixed)
IM MW100-01E
2-25
2.8 Connecting the RS-232 Interface (/C2 Option)
XON-XON
• Send Data Control
Software handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer. If
X-OFF is received from the computer while the instrument is sending data, data sending stops, and restarts when the next X-ON code is received. CS from the computer is ignored.
• Receive Data Control
Software handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer.
When the used capacity of the instrument’s receive buffer reaches 1537 bytes, an X-
OFF code is sent to the computer, and when the buffer reaches 511 byte, the X-ON code is sent.
RS = True (fixed)
XON-RS
• Send Data Control
Software handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer. If
X-OFF is received from the personal computer while the instrument is sending data, data sending stops, and restarts when the next X-ON code is received. CS from the computer is ignored.
• Receive Data Control
Hardware handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer.
When the used capacity of the instrument’s receive buffer reaches 1537 bytes, RS is set to False, and when the buffer reaches 511 byte, RS is set to True.
CS-RS
• Send Data Control
Hardware handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer. If
CS becomes False while the instrument is sending data, transmission stops and restarts when CS becomes True. X-OFF and X-ON from the computer are treated as data.
• Receive Data Control
Hardware handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer.
When the used capacity of the instrument’s receive buffer reaches 1537 bytes, RS is set to False, and when the buffer reaches 511 byte, RS is set to True.
Connection Examples
• OFF-OFF/XON-XON
PC
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
MW
3
2
7
8
5
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
• CS-RS(CTS-RTS)
PC MW
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
3
2
7
8
5
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
• XON-RS(XON-RTS)
PC
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
3
2
7
8
5
MW
SD
RD
RS
CS
SG
The RS on the PC side and the CS on the instrument side do not need to be connected for control.
However, we recommend that they be connected so that the cable can be connected in either direction.
Note
• A computer program must be created such that the receive buffers of the instrument and computer do not become FULL.
• When selecting XON-XON, output data in ASCII format.
2-26
IM MW100-01E
2.9
Serial Interface Settings
Selecting the Baud Rate
Select a baud rate from the list below.
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Setting the Data Length
Select a data length from the list below. When outputting data in binary format, you must use 8 bits.
7, 8
Selecting the Parity Check
Select a parity check from the list below.
ODD, EVEN, NONE
Selecting the Stop Bit
Select a bit length from the list below.
1, 2
Selecting the Handshaking Method
Select a handshaking method from the list below. This setting is only valid when using the RS-232 interface.
OFF:OFF, XON:XON, XON:RS, CS:RS
Selecting an Address
Select an address from the list below. This is valid for the RS-422A/485 interface and
Modbus protocol.
1 to 32 (for dedicated protocol)
1 to 247 (for Modbus protocol)
Selecting the Standard Protocol
Select NORMAL when performing communications using the “Standard” RS-232 or RS-
422A/485 protocol.
2
2-27
IM MW100-01E
2-28
2.10 Measures Against Noise on the MW100 Data
Acquisition Unit
The technical Information described below is available as reference material on measures against noise. For information on obtaining a copy, contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer.
• Noise Interference on Recorder (TI 4D5B1-80E)
Describes the fundamentals concerning noise and its countermeasures in two parts: basic edition and application edition.
• MX100 Performance Specifications (TI 04M08B01-00E)
This describes in detail the noise rejection characteristics and functions that are unique to the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.
This section briefly describes the integrating A/D converter and the first-order lag filter that the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit employs as measures against noise.
Integrating A/D Converter
MW100 input modules employ integrating A/D converters for converting the measured analog signals into digital signals. The integrating A/D converter integrates the measured values at the specified time width. If the specified time spacing matches the period of the signal you wish to reject, the signal is rejected.
Cancelled out
Input voltage
(instantaneous value)
DC voltage (average value)
Integration time
For example, if the integration time is 20 ms, signals having frequencies of 50 Hz and integer multiples of 50 Hz can be rejected. Likewise, if the integration time is 16.67 ms, signals having frequencies of 60 Hz and integer multiples of 60 Hz can be rejected. If the integration time is 100 ms, signals having 10 Hz and integer multiples of 10 Hz can be rejected. The commercial power supply is one of the noise sources. By setting these integration times, commercial power noise of 50 Hz or 60 Hz can be eliminated.
On the MW100, the integration time is set as shown below.
4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module
Measurement
Interval
10 ms
50 ms
Integration
Time
1.67 ms
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto
Rejected Frequencies and Notes
600 Hz and its integer multiples
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.67 or 20 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1 s
2, 5,10, 20, 30, 60 s
36.67 ms
100 ms
200 ms
50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples
10 Hz and its integer multiples
Low-pass filter with Fc = 5 Hz
6-CH, Medium-Speed 4-wire RTD Resistance Input Module/10-CH, Middle-Speed Universal Input Module
Measurement
Interval
100 ms
Integration
Time
Rejected Frequencies and Notes
1.67 ms 600 Hz and its integer multiples*
200 ms
500 ms
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.6 or 20 ms
1 s
2 s
36.67 ms
100 ms
50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples
10 Hz and its integer multiples
5, 10, 20, 30, 60 s
200 ms Low-pass filter with Fc = 5 Hz
* Because the power supply frequency noise is not rejected, measured values may fluctuate particularly for temperature measurements using thermocouples. If this happens, make the measurement interval longer, or use the 4-CH High-Speed Universal Input Module.
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
2.10 Measures Against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module
Measurement
Interval
100 ms
200ms
Integration
Time
1.67 ms
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto
36.67 ms
100 ms
Rejected Frequencies and Notes
600 Hz and its integer multiples*
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.67 or 20 ms
50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples
10 Hz and its integer multiples
500 ms
1 s
2 s
5, 10, 20, 30,60 s
200 ms Low-pass filter with Fc = 5 Hz
* When the measurement interval is 100 ms, measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency
noise is not rejected.
In such cases, set the measurement interval to 200 ms or more.
However, when using the SNTP time synchronization function, the integral times below are used.
6-CH, Medium-Speed 4-wire RTD Resistance Input Module/
10-CH, Middle-Speed Universal Input Module
Measurement
Interval
Integration
Time
Rejected Frequencies and Notes
100 ms
200 ms
1.67 ms 600 Hz and its integer multiples *
500 ms
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.6 or 20 ms
1 s
2 s
5 s
10, 20, 30, 60 s
36.67 ms
100 ms
200 ms
50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples
10 Hz and its integer multiples
Low-pass filter with Fc = 5 Hz
* Because the power supply frequency noise is not rejected, measured values may fluctuate particularly
for temperature measurements using thermocouples. If this happens, make the measurement interval
longer, or use the 4-CH High-Speed Universal Input Module.
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module
Measurement
Interval
Integration
Time
Rejected Frequencies and Notes
100 ms
200 ms
1.67 ms
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto
36.67 ms
600 Hz and its integer multiples*
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.6 or 20 ms
50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples
500 ms
1 s
2 s
100 ms 10 Hz and its integer multiples
5, 10, 20, 30, 60 s
200 ms
Low-pass filter with Fc = 5 Hz
* When the measurement interval is 100 ms, measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency
noise is not rejected.
In such cases, set the measurement interval to 200 ms or more.
2
2-29
2.10 Measures Against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit
First-Order Lag Filter
For noise sources other than power supply noise, the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit is equipped with a first-order lag filter having output characteristics indicated in the figure below against step input.
For the filter setting, the time constant is determined by selecting filter coefficient N for the measurement interval.
100%
Step input
Output characteristics
63.2% of the output value
0%
Time constant
Filter coefficient = measurement interval x filter coefficient N
2
5
0.5
1
10
20
0.01
0.05
0.1
0.2
30
60
Measurement Interval (s) Selectable Time Constants (s)
25
50
100
150
300
1
2.5
5
10
N=5 N=10 N=20 N=25 N=40 N=50 N=100
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.25
0.4
0.5
1
0.25
0.5
0.5
1
1
2
1.25
2.5
2
4
2.5
5
5
10
2
5
10
20
4
10
20
40
5
12.5
20
25
50
8
40
80
10
25
50
100
20
50
100
200
50 100
100 200
200 400
125 200
250 400
500 800
250 500
500 1000
1000 2000
300 600 750 1200 1500 3000
600 1200 1500 2400 3000 6000
If the first-order lag filter is applied to the input signal, low-pass filter frequency characteristics shown in the figure below are attained.
Attenuation
0dB
–3dB
Cutoff frequency
Pass band
Cutoff band
Frequency
If the time constant of the first-order lag filter is set long, the cutoff frequency is lowered, and frequency bandwidth that can be rejected is widened. Set an appropriate time constant according to the frequency of the noise you wish to reject.
2-30
IM MW100-01E
2.11 Handling of the CF Card
Handling Precautions of the CF Card
Note the following points when using the CF card. For the general handling precautions of the CF card, see the instruction manual that came with the CF card.
• The CF card is a precision electronic device. Do not use or store the CF card in an environment with strong static electricity or an environment where electric noise tends to appear.
• Do not remove the CF card from the card slot while data is being written. Doing so can damage or erase the data.
Inserting the CF Card
When inserting the CF card into the card slot, first touch the antistatic metal, then open the slot cover, and finally insert the card with the back side facing left as in the figure below.
2
Antistatic metal
Card slot
Eject lever
Reverse side of the CF card
Slot cover
Ejecting the CF Card
Be sure to check that the CF card is not being accessed before ejecting the card from the slot.
To eject the CF card, first open the slot cover while touching the antistatic metal, then push the eject lever. Then, press the eject lever that came out once again, and remove the CF card from the slot.
Note
• If the eject lever is difficult to push with your finger, use the tip of a pen or other pointed object.
• Do not close the slot cover by force when the eject lever is out. Doing so can damage the
CF card slot. When not using the eject lever, push the lever in so that the slot cover can be closed.
2-31
IM MW100-01E
Chapter 3 Setting and Data Acquisition
3.1
Connection Environment
PC System Requirements
• PC Hardware
Intel Pentium II, 400-MHz CPU or higher (Pentium III, 1-GHz or higher recommended) and at least 256 MB of memory (512 MB or more recommended).
• OS (Operating System)
Windows 2000 or Windows XP (recommended) required.
• Display
XGA (1024 × 768 resolution) or better and capable of displaying 65535 or more colors.
• Ethernet Port
An Ethernet port compatible with the OS (requires 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX).
Browser
This section explains the environment in which the MW100 is connected, including requirements for the PC system, browser and plug-in software, and setting screens.
This chapter focuses on settings entered with the browser. For information about communication commands, see the Communication Command manual (IM MW100-
17E).
The following browser is required for entry of settings on the MW100.
• Internet Explorer 5.0 or later (recommended)
Installing Java
Java is required for entering settings using a browser.
• JRE (Java runtime environment) version 1.4 or later. (Version 1.4 recommended)
Java might not be installed on the following operating systems.
• Windows 2000 SP4 or later
• Windows XP SP2 or later
If not installed, you can install it from the MW100 User’s Manual CD.
MW100 Operation Screens
The operation screens of the MW100 main module consist of Monitor screens enabling operations in Measurement mode, Setting screens that are mainly used in Setting mode, and Status screens for mode changes.
Top Screen
• Monitor
Single Screen, Dual Screen
• Setting
Channel Setting, System Setting, Display Setting, Communication Setting
• Status
Measurement, Recording, and MATH status changes
When entering settings, the pages for all setting items are displayed, but there may be settings or items that cannot be entered depending on the installed modules and options.
3
3-1
IM MW100-01E
3.1 Connection Environment
3-2
Single Screen and Dual Screens
Monitor-displays the data from the MW100.
For details on the operation, see section 3.16, “Measured Data Monitor Display/
Settings.”
Channel Setting
You can set the measuring range, expressions, and other items.
System Setting
You can set the measurement interval, measurement groups, and other items.
IM MW100-01E
Display Setting
You can set tags, display groups, and other items.
3.1 Connection Environment
Communication Setting
You can perform user registration and enter FTP/e-mail settings, and other items.
3
Switching Modes
The MW100 has a Measurement mode and a Setting mode, and the mode must be changed depending on the operation to be performed. For operating procedures, see section 3.3, “System Settings.”
Meas. Mode
To Single Screen or Dual Screens for the monitor, switch to Measurement mode. The items to set after switching to Measurement mode are shown in the figure below.
Setting Mode
To modify channel settings, system settings, display settings, or communication settings, switch to Setting mode. The items to set after switching to Setting mode are shown in the figure below.
IM MW100-01E
3-3
3-4
3.2
Connection to the MW100
Connection to the MW100 can be made using Ethernet or serial communications
(optional). Also, when performing communication using the Modbus protocol, Modbus settings are required. When the login function is enabled, connection is made after entering a user name and password.
Setting Mode
Ethernet Connection
Setting Up Ethernet for the First Time, IP Address Unclear
Ethernet connections are not possible under the factory default settings. You must enter an IP address.
1.
After opening an Ethernet connection between the MW100 and PC, run the
MW100 Viewer software CD-ROM or the IP address setting software installed on the PC.
2.
You can select to enter a fixed IP address, or have the address automatically obtained by DHCP. If you select a fixed IP address, enter the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DNS.
3.
Skip to the procedures under Connecting to an MW100 with a Specified IP
Address (Including DHCP).
For the setting procedure, see the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual (IM MW180-
01E). You can also start up and connect using a fixed IP address.
When Connecting to an MW100 with a Specified IP Address (Including DHCP).
1.
Open an Ethernet connection between the MW100 and PC, then start the browser.
2.
Enter the host name or IP address of the MW100 in the browser’s URL/Address box. The MW100 top page appears. If the login function is set, step 3 is required.
Ex. 1) IP address is 192.168.1.100
http://192.168.1.100/
Ex. 2) Host name is mw100user
http://mw100user/
3.
Before the top page appears, the network password entry screen is displayed.
Enter a user name and password and click the OK button.
Changing the IP Address and Connecting
This is used when an IP address has already been set, and the IP address will be changed by browser or DHCP before connecting. To change the IP address, follow steps 1-6 and 10-11. For changes by DHCP, follow steps 1-3 and 7-11.
1.
From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > IP Address Setting.
2.
Enter a host name in the Host Name box under DNS Information.
3.
Enter a domain name in the Domain Name box under DNS Information.
4.
Enter a fixed IP address in the IP Address box under IP Address Information.
5.
Enter a subnet address in the Subnet Mask box under IP Address Information.
6.
Enter a default gateway address in the Default Gateway box under IP Address
Information.
7.
To enable the DHCP client function, select the DHCP Client Function check box.
IM MW100-01E
3.2 Connection to the MW100
8.
To obtain DNS information from the server, select the DNS Information check box.
9.
To register a host name on the server, select the Host Name check box.
10.
Click the Apply button.
11.
Power cycle the MW100. The setting changes are applied.
3
Connecting with Serial Communication (Optional)
You can enter settings using a browser, or with communication commands. The following explains setting entry using a browser. For information about communication commands, see the Communication Command manual (IM MW100-17E).
From the top page, click Communication Setting > Serial Communication Setting.
Receiver Settings
1.
In the Function list, select NORMAL (general communications), MODBUS_M
(Modbus master), or MODBUS_S (Modbus slave). Modbus settings consist of master and slave settings.
2.
Enter an address number in the Address box.
Data Transfer Settings
1.
Select a baud rate in the Baud Rate list.
2.
Select a parity check method in the Parity Bit list.
3.
Select a number of bits from the Stop Bit list.
4.
Select a communication data length from the Data Length list.
5.
Select a handshaking method in the Handshake list.
Click the Apply button.
IM MW100-01E
3-5
3.2 Connection to the MW100
Modbus Settings
Set when using the Modbus function. For Modbus/TCP, set “Modbus client settings 1, 2, and 3.” For Modbus/RTU, set “Modbus master settings 1 and 2,” and “Receiver settings.”
Modbus Master Setting 1
1.
From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > Modbus Master Setting
1.
2.
Select the Enable check box under Master Function.
3.
Select a communication interval from the Cycle list under Communication.
4.
Select a timeout time from the Communication Timeout list under
Communication.
5.
In the Gap between Messages list under Communication, select a gap time from receiving of the response until the sending of the next command.
6.
Select a number of times in the Retransmission list under Recovery Action.
7.
Enter a recovery wait time in the Wait Time box under Recover Action.
8.
Click the Apply button.
Modbus Master Setting 2
1.
From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > Modbus Master Setting
2.
2.
Select the command number group to be set from the Command List list.
3.
Select READ/WRITE in the Function box.
4.
Enter the address of the slave device in the Slave box.
5.
Enter the numbers of the used registers in the Register box. When specifying multiple registers, enter the first register number.
6.
Select a data type in the Data Type list.
7.
Enter the channel numbers used in the Channel boxes.
8.
Click the Apply button.
3-6
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
3.2 Connection to the MW100
Modbus Client Setting 1
1.
From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > Modbus Client Setting 1.
2.
Select the Enable check box under Client Function. After clicking the Apply button, the settings are enabled and communication begins.
Clear the Enable check box and click the Apply button to stop communications.
3.
Select a communication interval from the Cycle list under Communication.
4.
If you select the Close check box and there is no response from the server, communication is closed after the time entered in Connection Timeout elapses.
5.
Enter the time until communication is closed in the Connection Timeout to box under Connection.
6.
Enter the time until communications are recovered in the Wait Time box under
Recovery Action.
7.
Click the Apply button.
3
Modbus Client Setting 2
1.
From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > Modbus Client Setting 2.
The server list is displayed.
2.
Enter the server name in the Server box.
3.
Enter the server port number in the Port box.
4.
Enter the server unit number in the Unit No. box.
5.
Click the Apply button.
3-7
3.2 Connection to the MW100
Modbus Client Setting 3
1.
From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > Modbus Client Setting 3.
2.
Enter settings in the same manner as for Modbus Master Setting 2. Enter the server number of the server list in the Server box.
Login Function and User Settings
Using this function, you can restrict access to previously registered users.
From the Top screen, click Communication Setting > User Setting.
Login Function
Select the Enable check box. This enables the login function.
User Settings
1.
Select ADMIN or USER in the Level list under User List. Only ADMIN can be selected for list number 01.
2.
Enter the user name to set in the User Name box under User List.
3.
Enter the password to assign to the user in the Password box under User List.
Click the Apply button.
3-8
IM MW100-01E
3.3
System Settings
Setting Mode
System Reconstruction
When connecting the MW100 for the first time, or when changing the position of an installed input/output module on the connected MW100, system reconfiguration is performed (to match up with the actual modules). Before reconfiguration, connect to the
MW100 to be reconfigured.
Note
Always turn the power to the MW100 OFF before attaching or removing input/output modules.
Setting Module Information
1.
From the top page, click System Setting > Module Information.
2.
If the Configured Module and Attached Module boxes are different, click the
Reconstruct button to reconfigure the system.
3
Setting the Date and Time
Sets the date and time on the MW100.
1.
From the top page, click System Setting > Date and Time.
2.
Enter the year, month, and date in the Date box. Use the last two digits of the
Western calendar for the year.
3.
Enter the hour, minute, and second in the Time box. Time is specified in 24hour format.
4.
Enter the hour and minutes in the Time Zone box.
5.
Click the Apply button.
3-9
IM MW100-01E
3.3 System Settings
Formatting the CF Card, Checking the Free Space and System Information , and
Initialization
You can format the CF card and check the amount of available space on the card. Also, you can check system information and initialize settings in the same screen.
From the top screen, click System Setting > System Information.
Checking the Free Disk Space
The amount of used and total space is displayed in the Capacity box under Media
Information.
Formatting
1.
Select the Format check box under Media Information.
2.
Click the Initialize button to initialize the CF card.
Checking System Information and Initializing
You can view the model name, serial number, installed options, firmware version, and
WEB software version in the corresponding display boxes.
Also, you can initialize system settings. For details, see section 4.6, “Initializing the
System.”
1.
Select the initialization level from the Initialization Level list.
2.
Click the Initialize button to initialize the system settings.
Daylight saving Time Setting
1.
From the top screen, click System Setting > Daylight Saving Time Setting.
2.
Select the Daylight Saving Time check box. The Summer time and Winter time function is enabled.
3.
Select a starting month, week, and day of the week for the start of Summer time in the Start Time box. Enter a start time in the box.
4.
Select an ending month, week, and day of the week for the end of Summer time in the End Time box. Enter an end time in the box.
5.
Click the Apply button. The Summer time and Winter time start times are enabled.
3-10
IM MW100-01E
3.3 System Settings
Other Settings
You can set the MW100 unit number, units of temperature, key lock for preventing inadvertent operations, alarm hold, and rate of change interval.
From the top screen, click System Setting > Other Settings.
Unit Number
Enter a number from 0 to 89 for identifying the unit in the Unit No. box.
Temperature Unit
Select Celsius DEG_C or Fahrenheit DEG_F in the Temperature Unit list.
Main Unit Key Lock
If the Key Lock check box is selected, the key lock becomes active.
Alarm Status Hold
If the Hold check box is selected, alarms are held.
Rate of Change Interval
1.
Enter the measurement count that determines the interval in the Increase
Interval box under Rate-of-Change Alarm.
2.
Enter the measurement count that determines the interval in the Decrease
Interval box under Rate-of-Change Alarm.
Click the Apply button. The settings for each item are enabled.
3
Status Information and Processing
You can change the MW100 operation mode, operate the main unit keys, and check alarm statuses.
Changing Status Information (Mode)
From the top screen, click System Setting > Status Information. You can perform the same procedure in the Status table in the top screen.
• Switching between Measurement Mode and Setting Mode
1 In the Operation box under Measurement, you can select START to switch to
Measurement mode, or STOP to switch to Setting mode.
2.
Click the Apply button. The changed status is displayed in the Status display box.
• Computation Start/Stop
1 In the Operation box under the MATH item, you can select START to start computation, or STOP to stop computation.
2.
Click the Apply button. The changed status is displayed in the Status display box. You can also start and stop computation from the Monitor screen.
• Recording Start/Stop
1 In the Operation box under the Recording item, you can select START to start recording, or STOP to stop recording.
2.
Click the Apply button. The changed status is displayed in the Status display box. You can also start and stop recording from the Monitor screen.
IM MW100-01E
3-11
3.3 System Settings
Checking Status Information
When an alarm occurs, Waiting Alarm ACK is displayed in each display box.
Processing and Operation
• Operating Main Unit Keys
1.
Select the main unit key you wish to operate from the Key Operation list.
2.
Click the Apply button. The same operation takes place as if you had pressed the main unit key.
• Checking the Alarm Status
1.
Select the Alarm Acknowledge check box.
2.
Click the Apply button. Held alarms are cleared.
• Clearing the Error Display
1.
Select the Error Display check box.
2.
Click the Apply button. Clears the error number displayed in the 7-segment
LED.
• Executing Strain Initial Balancing
1.
Select the initial balance execution method from the Strain Initial Balancing list.
2.
Click the Apply button. Initial balancing is executed on the channel selected in the strain input settings in the channel settings.
• Execute Communication Test
1.
Select the item you wish to test from the Communication Test list.
2.
Click the Apply button. The test is executed.
3-12
IM MW100-01E
3.4
Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured/
Computed Data
This is an explanation of measurement settings, MATH settings, recording settings, and thinning settings.
Setting Mode
Measurement Operation Settings
From the top screen, click System Setting > Measurement Setting.
Measurement Group Settings
Select the measurement interval from the Interval list. Set a measurement interval for each group number.
Measurement Module Settings
Sets the integral time and measurement group assignments for each module. See each modulels specifications for the measurement interval and integral times that can be set on them.
1.
Select the group you wish to assign in the Interval Group list.
2.
Select an integral time of AUTO, 50 Hz, or 60 Hz in the A/D Integration Time list. This setting is enabled from the measurement interval.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
Note
The measurement interval that is assigned to the measurement group number is,
(interval is short) < meas. group1 ≤ meas. group2 ≤ meas. group 3 < (interval is long)
3
Computation Operation Settings
From the top screen, click System Setting > MATH Setting.
IM MW100-01E
MATH Interval Settings
Select the measurement group number in the Interval Group list. This becomes the interval that is assigned to the selected group number. Set a value that is the same as the measurement interval of at least one of the installed input modules.
MATH Settings
In step 1, set the operation upon computation error, and in steps 2 and 3, set the measurement input other than for TLOG/CLOG computation.
1.
Select +OVER or –OVER in the Computation Error Data list.
2.
Select ERROR (computation error) or SKIP in the Abnormal Input Data list.
3.
Select ERROR (Overflow value), SKIP, or LIMIT in the Overflowed Data list.
3-13
3.4 Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured/Computed Data
TLOG and CLOG Computation
Sets the operation for TLOG and CLOG computation.
1.
Select the units of integration in the TLOG Time Scale list.
2.
Select ERROR (computation error) or SKIP in the Abnormal Input Data list.
3.
Select ERROR (computation error), SKIP, or LIMIT in the Overflowed Data list.
4.
Select OVER (computation stop) or ROTATE in the PSUM Overflowed Data list.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
Recording Operation Settings
From the top screen, click System Setting > Recording Setting.
Set the recording operation for each measurement group.
1.
Select the recording start timing in the Mode list under Interval Group.
If you select DIRECT, steps 2 and 3 are required, and if you select TRIGGER, steps 2 to 5 are required.
2.
Select the recording operation in the Action list under Interval Group.
3.
Select the recording interval in the Recording Interval list under Interval Group.
4.
Select a recording data length from the Data Length list under Interval Group.
5.
Select a pretrigger length (%) from the Pre-trigger list under Interval Group.
Recording Operation Settings
1.
Select a recording data length from the DIRECT Data Length list.
Measurement groups for which the recording start timing is DIRECT are all set to this.
2.
Select the remaining space time in the Limit for Media Alarm list. When the specified remaining amount is reached, you can have output such as relay output occur.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
3-14
IM MW100-01E
3.4 Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured/Computed Data
Thinning Operation Settings
From the top screen, click System Setting > Thinning Recording Setting.
Thinning Settings
Select the Enable check box. Thinning recording is enabled, and you can enter thinning recording settings.
Setting the Thinning Interval, Recording Operation, and Recording Data Length
1.
Select the thinning time in the Recording Interval list. A time shorter than the measurement interval specified for the measurement group cannot be set.
2.
Select a recording operation in the Recording Action list.
3.
Select a recording data length from the Data Length list.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
3
Recording Channel Settings
You can set the channels to which data is recorded or thinned.
1.
From the top screen, click Channel Setting > Recording Channel Setting.
2.
Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Recording and Thinning Settings
1.
Turn ON recording in the Recording list when recording data.
2.
Turn ON data thinning in the Thinning Recording list when thinning data.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
IM MW100-01E
3-15
3-16
3.5
Setting Measurement Conditions
(Measurement Channel Settings)
Setting Mode
Measurement Channel Settings
You can set the input type, range, span, computations, scale and differential input.
The selectable input type, range, and other settings can differ depending on the module.
For details, see the explanation of the functions of individual modules in chapter 1,
“Explanation of Functions,” or chapter 5, “Specifications.”
For information on the scale value of the measuring range, see section 3.12, “Scale
Value Settings.”
Setting the Input Range
1.
From the top screen, click Channel Setting > AI/DI Channel Setting.
2.
Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Setting the Input Mode
Select the input type from the Mode list.
Setting the Measuring Range
Select the measurement range from the Range list.
Setting the Measurement Span
Determines the actual measuring range from the measurable range.
Enter the lower and upper limit of Span in the Lower or Upper boxes under Span.
Setting the Scale
Set this item when linearly scaling the measured values.
1.
Select SCALE in the Calc list.
2.
Enter the lower or upper limit of scale in the Lower or Upper box under Scale.
3.
Select the decimal place from the D.P. list under Scale.
4.
Enter the scale conversion value in the Unit box.
Differential Input Settings
1.
Select DELTA in the Computation box.
2.
Enter the reference channel number in the Reference box.
Remote RJC (RRJC) Reference Channel Setting
Enter the remote RJC reference channel number in the Ref. Ch. box. This is required when RRJC is selected for the input type.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
IM MW100-01E
3.5 Setting Measurement Conditions indstop (indstart Measurement Channel Settings)
Filter and Thermocouple Settings
You can set filters for measurement channels. Also, when the input type is set to thermocouple (TC), you can set the burnout/RJC behavior. This setting is allowed even if the input type of the measurement channel is something other than thermocouple (TC), but has no effect in that case.
From the top screen, click Channel Setting > Filter, Burnout, RJC Setting.
Setting the Filter Coefficient
Select a coefficient in the Filter list. For information about filter coefficients, see section
2.10, “Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit.”
Setting the Burnout
Select the direction in which the measured value is set off the range when a burnout detection occurs from the Burnout list.
Reference Junction Compensation
1.
Select the type of reference junction compensation in the Type box under RJC.
2.
Enter a reference junction compensation voltage in the Voltage[uV] box. Set when reference junction compensation is set to external (EXT).
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
3
Setting Up and Executing Strain Input Initial Balancing
If the measurement channel is strain input, you can enter settings for executing initial balancing. This setting is allowed even if the measurement channel is something other than strain input, but has no effect in that case.
1.
From the top screen, click Channel Settings > Strain Input Setting.
2.
Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
3.
Turn ON the channel on which you wish to perform initial balancing in the Initial
Balancing list.
4.
Click the Apply button to finalize.
IM MW100-01E
5.
Execute the Initial balance items in the Status information of the system settings. For details, see section 3.3, “System Settings.”
3-17
3-18
3.6
MATH Settings (MATH Channel Settings and the /M1 Option)
You can set the MATH operation, expressions, scales, MATH coefficients, and MATH groups. This section also explains settings for program channels and communication input data.
For information on entering the MATH span in expressions, see section 3.12, “Scale
Input Methods.”
Setting Mode
Entering Expressions
1.
From the top screen, click Channel Setting > MATH Channel Setting.
2.
Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Setting the MATH Operation
Turn ON the MATH channels to be used in the Action list.
Entering Expressions
Enter an expression in the Formula box. For information about expressions, see section
1.13, “MATH Functions (/M1 Option).”
Setting the MATH Span
1.
Enter the lower or upper limit of the MATH span in the Lower or Upper box under Span.
2.
Select the decimal place from the D.P. list under Span.
3.
Enter the scale conversion value in the Unit box.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
IM MW100-01E
3.6 MATH Settings (MATH Channel Settings and the /M1 Option)
Setting MATH Constants
1.
From the top screen, click Channel Setting > MATH Constant Setting.
2.
Select the constant group you wish to set from the Constant List list.
Entering Math Constants
Enter a constant in the Constant List list.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
3
Setting MATH Groups
1.
From the top screen, click Channel Setting > MATH Group Settings.
2.
Enter the channel numbers to be grouped in the Channel Set box.
Specify channel numbers by delimiting them with dots as in A001.A003.A006, or specify a range as in A004-A008.
3.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
IM MW100-01E
3-19
3.6 MATH Settings (MATH Channel Settings and the /M1 Option)
Program Channel Settings
1.
From the top screen, click Channel Setting > Program Channel Setting.
2.
Select SINGLE or REPEAT in the Action box for the program channel number you wish to use.
3.
Enter the elapsed time and setting value in the Point Set box. For information about formats, see section 1.13, “MATH Functions (/M1 Option).”
4.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
Setting Mode
Meas. Mode
Communication Input Data Settings
1.
From the top screen, click Channel Settings > COM Input Channel Setting.
2.
Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
3.
Enter the communication input data value in the Input Value box. For the range of available communication input values, see chapter 5, “Specifications.”
4.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
3-20
IM MW100-01E
3.7
Setting Alarms
You can set the alarm type, alarm value, hysteresis, and output operation. For information about alarm types and other parameters, see section 1.3, “Functions of the
Main Module.”During recording, only values can be changed.
Setting Mode
Meas. Mode
Alarm Setting (AI/DI)
You can set measurement channel alarms.
1.
From the top screen, click Channel Setting > Alarm Setting (AI/DI).
2.
Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Alarm Settings
1.
Select the alarm type from the Level list.
2.
Enter an alarm value in the Value box.
3.
Enter a hysteresis value in the Hysteresis box.
Output Settings
1.
Turn output ON/OFF in the Action box.
2.
Enter an alarm output channel in the Relay box.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
3
Alarm Setting (MATH)
You can set MATH channel alarms.
1.
From the top screen, click Channel Setting > Alarm Setting (MATH).
2.
Below, enter settings in the same manner as with measurement alarms. With
MATH alarms, there is no hysteresis setting.
IM MW100-01E
3-21
3-22
3.8
Digital Output Settings
Setting Mode
Relay Settings
You can set the operation type, excitation status, hold, operation, and reflash.
1.
From the top screen, click Channel Setting > DO Channel Setting.
2.
Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Relay Output Factor Settings
Select Relay output factor from the Type box. If you select ALARM, you must set
Energize/De-energize, hold, operation, and re-alarm. If you select CommandDO(COM), you must set Energize/De-energize.
Energize Setting
Select to energize (ENERG) or de-energize (DE_EN) the relay in the Energize list.
Hold, Action, and Reflash Settings
1.
To set the relay status to Hold in the Hold list, select ON.
2.
Select a relay operation condition in the Action list.
3.
Select ON in the Reflash list to perform the reflash function.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
IM MW100-01E
3.9
Analog/PWM Output Settings
Setting Mode
You can enter analog and PWM output settings.
1.
From the top screen, click Channel Setting > AO/PWM Channel Settings.
2.
Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Output Range Settings (Analog Output)
You can set the output type, action, range, span, preset value, and reference channel.
Output Types
In the Mode box, select AO to output or SKIP to not output.
Output Action Setting
Select TRANS (transmission output) or COM (arbitrary output) in the Action box.
Output Range Settings
Select 10 V (voltage output) or 20 mA (current output) in the Range box.
Span Setting
Select the actual output range from the allowed output range.
Enter the lower limit of span in the Lower box under Span. Also, enter the upper limit value in the Upper box.
Preset Value
In the Preset Value box, enter a preset value for the output operation when turning on the power or when an error occurs. When a preset value is selected in the output operation settings, the specified value is output.
Reference Channel Settings
Enter an input channel or MATH channel for transmission output in the Reference
Channel box. This is set if TRANS is selected for the output action.
3
3-23
IM MW100-01E
3.9 Analog/PWM Output Settings
Output Range Settings (PWM Output)
You can set the output type, action, range, span, pulse interval, preset value, and reference channel.
Output Type
In the Mode box, select PWM to output or SKIP to not output.
Output Action Settings
Select TRANS (transmission output) or COM (arbitrary output) in the Action box.
Setting the Pulse Resolution
Select the pulse resolution in the Range box.
Span Setting
Select the actual output range from the allowed output range.
Enter the lower limit of span in the Lower box under Span. Also, enter the upper limit value in the Upper box.
Pulse Interval
In the Pulse Interval box, enter a coefficient that determines the pulse interval.
Preset Value
In the Preset Value box, enter a preset value for the output operation when turning on the power or when an error occurs. When a preset value is selected in the output operation settings, the specified value is output.
Reference Channel Settings
Enter an input channel or MATH channel for transmission output in the Ref. Channel box. This is set if TRANS is selected for the output method.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
3-24
IM MW100-01E
3.9 Analog/PWM Output Settings
Output Operation Settings
You can set the operation upon power ON and when an error occurs.
1.
From the top screen, click System Setting > AO/PWM Preset Setting.
2.
Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
Setting the Power ON Operation
Select LAST or PRESET in the Power ON list under Preset Value.
When PRESET is selected, the specified value is output in the output range setting screen.
Setting the Operation upon Error Occurrence
Select LAST or PRESET in the Error list under Preset Value.
When PRESET is selected, the specified value is output in the output range setting screen.
3
IM MW100-01E
3-25
3.9 Analog/PWM Output Settings
Meas. Mode
Transmission Output Control
Turning Transmission Output ON and OFF for Analog Output/PWM Output
This is set if TRANS is selected for the output action in the output range settings.
1.
From the top screen, click Channel Setting > Transmission Output Control.
2.
Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
3.
Select ON or OFF in the Output list of the channel number you wish to set.
4.
Click the Apply button. Starts transmission output on channels set to ON.
3-26
IM MW100-01E
3.10 Event/Action Settings
By linking the Event function and Action function, you can control the operations of the
MW100.
Setting Mode
1.
From the top screen, click System Setting > Event/Action Setting.
2.
Select the number group of the Event / Action you wish to set from the list.
Selecting the Event Type
1.
Select the event (event function) type in the Event list of the number you wish to set. Depending on this setting, the Channel box may become enabled, meaning that the settings in steps 2 and 3 are required.
2.
In the Channel box, enter the number (channel number, relay number, etc.) for the event selected in the event type selection in step 1.
3.
If the event type is ALARM_CH, select the alarm level number for the event in the Channel box.
Selecting the Event Detection Method
Select the event detection method from the Detection list. The action (action function) that can be selected varies depending on the item selected for the detection method.
Selecting the Action Type
1.
Select the action (Action function) type from the Action list. If Flag is selected for the action, the Flag box is enabled, meaning that the setting in step 2 is required.
2.
Enter a flag number in the Flag box.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
3
3-27
IM MW100-01E
3.11 Timer and Match Time Settings
The time up action function can be controlled through the specified time interval and time.
Setting Mode
Timer Settings
From the top screen, click System Setting > Timer Setting.
Relative Time Timer
1.
Select RELATIVE in the Mode list.
2.
Enter the desired time interval in the Relative Time boxes. The day, hour, and
minute are arranged in order from the left.
Absolute Time Timer
1.
Select ABSOLUTE in the Mode list.
2.
Enter the desired reference time in the Ref. Time boxes under Absolute Time.
The hour and minute are in order from the left in the box.
3.
Select the time interval you wish to set in the Interval list under Absolute Time.
M and H indicate the minute and hour respectively.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
Setting the Match Time
From the top screen, click System Setting > Match Time Setting.
Monthly Timeup
1.
Select MONTH in the Mode list.
2.
Enter the desired date and time in the Time list. The day, hour, and minute are arranged in order from the left.
Weekly Timeup
1.
Select WEEK in the Mode list.
2.
Select a day of the week from the Time list, and enter the desired time in the
Time box. Enter the hour and minute in the second and third box from the left,
respectively.
Weekly Timeup
1.
Select DAY in the Mode list.
2.
Enter the desired time in the Time box. Enter the hour and minute in the second and third box from the left, respectively.
Click the Apply button. This enables the settings changes.
3-28
IM MW100-01E
3.12 Scale Input Methods
Scale Values
The following explains the methods for inputting scale values.
Enter only the desired number of digits in the box for the upper and lower limit values of scale. Select the number of digits after the decimal point from the list.
Desired Scale
0.00 to 100.00
10.0 to 500.0
–6.000 to 4.500
Number Input
Lower limit: 0
Upper limit: 10000
Lower limit: 100
Upper limit: 5000
Lower limit: –6000
Upper limit: 4500
Decimal Point Position
2
1
3
Example of a filled in screen.
3
IM MW100-01E
3-29
3-30
3.13 Starting and Stopping Measurement,
Computation, and Recording
This is an explanation of the procedure for starting and stopping measurement, computation, and recording. These operations can be performed by pressing keys on the MW100 main module, or from a browser.
Starting and stopping of measurement, computation, and recording must be performed one at a time.
Starting and Stopping Measurement
Using Main Module Keys
• Starting Measurement
While measurement is stopped, briefly press the START key. Measurement starts and the unit switches to Measurement mode.
• Stopping Measurement
While recording and computation are stopped, briefly press the STOP key.
Measurement stops and the unit switches to Setting mode.
Using a Browser
• Starting Measurement
In the Status table in the top screen, select START from the Operation list under the
Measurement item. Measurement starts and the unit switches to Measurement mode.
• Stopping Measurement
In the Status table in the top screen, select STOP from the Operation list under the
Measurement item. Measurement stops and the unit switches to Setting mode.
Starting and Stopping Computation
This function is enabled when the MATH function (/M1) option is installed. You can use the function when MATH channels are set.
Using Main Module Keys
• Computation Start
While recording is stopped, and during measurement, briefly press the START key.
Computation starts.
• Computation Stop
During computation, and while recording is stopped, briefly press the STOP key.
Computation stops.
Using a Browser
The main module can be switched to Measurement mode. This is done while recording is stopped.
• Starting Computation
1.
From the top screen, click Single Screen or Dual Screen under the Monitor item.
2.
Click the Start computation icon. Computation starts.
• Stopping Computation
1.
From the top screen, click Single Screen or Dual Screen under the Monitor item.
2.
Click the Stop computation icon. Computation stops.
For information about the operation screen, see section 3.16, “Measured Data Monitor
Display/Settings.”
IM MW100-01E
3.13 Starting and Stopping Measurement, Computation, and Recording
Starting and Stopping Recording
Using Main Module Keys
• Starting Recording
During measurement, hold down the START key for two or more seconds.
Recording starts.
• Stopping Recording
During recording, hold down the STOP key for two or more seconds. Recording stops.
Using a Browser
The main module can be switched to Measurement mode.
• Starting Recording
1.
From the top screen, click Single Screen or Dual Screen under the Monitor item.
2.
Click the Start Recording icon. Recording starts.
• Stopping Recording
1.
From the top screen, click Single Screen or Dual Screen under the Monitor item.
2.
Click the Stop Recording icon. Recording stops.
For information about the operation screen, see section 3.16, “Measured Data Monitor
Display/Settings.”
Computation and Recording According to Status
You can control the status of measurement, recording, and computation on the main module according to changes in status. For details, see section 3.3, “System Settings.”
Checking the Operating Status of the MW100 Using the Status Indicators
You can confirm the operational status of the MW100 by viewing the status indicators on the front panel.
MEASURE
Behavior
Off
On
Color
--
Green
Indication
Setting mode
Measurement mode
RECORD
Behavior
Turning Off
On
Blinking
Color
--
Green
Green
Indication
Recording stopped
Recording
Transitioning from recording to recording stop
ALARM
Behavior
Turning Off
On
MATH
Behavior
Turning Off
On
Blinking stopped
Color
--
Red
Color
--
Green
Green
Indication
No alarm
Alarm active or alarm hold
Indication
Computation stopped
Computing
Transitioning from computing to computing
IM MW100-01E
3-31
3
3-32
3.14 Network Utility Settings
Setting Mode
DNS Client Settings
1.
From the top screen, click Communication Setting > DNS Client Setting.
2.
In the Primary and Secondary boxes under DNS Server, enter the IP addresses of the respective DNS servers.
3.
In the Primary and Secondary boxes under Domain Suffix, enter the domain name.
4.
Click the Apply button.
FTP Client Settings
1.
From the top screen, click Communication Setting > FTP Client Setting.
2.
Select the Client function check box to enable the function.
3.
Enter the shift amount (in minutes) in the Transfer time shift box.
4.
Select the number of the destination to be set in the Destination list. You can set up to two destinations.
5.
Enter the server name in the Server Name box.
6.
Enter the server port number in the Port Number box.
7.
Enter the user name in the User Name box.
8.
Enter the password in the Password box.
9.
Enter the folder to be accessed when opening a connection in the Directory box.
10.
You can select the PASV Mode check box to use FTP passive mode.
11.
Click the Apply button.
IM MW100-01E
3.14 Network Utility Settings
Mail Client Settings
These settings configure the e-mail function. The setting screen contains mail client setting 1 and mail client setting 2.
Mail Client Setting 1
1.
From the top screen, click Communication Setting > Mail Client Setting 1.
2.
Select the SMTP Client Function check box. This enables e-mail transmission.
3.
Enter the name of the SMTP server in the Server Name box under SMTP
Server.
4.
Enter the SMTP server port number in the Port box under SMTP Server.
5.
Enter the name of the POP3 server in the Server box under POP3 Server.
6.
Enter the POP3 server port number in the Port box under POP3 Server.
7.
To require authorization (POP before SMTP) when sending e-mail, select POP3 in the User Authorization list. This enables entry of the User Authorization items.
8.
Enter the name for logging into the POP3 server in the User box under User
Authorization.
9.
Enter the password for logging into the POP3 server in the Password box under
User Authorization.
10.
Click the Apply button.
3
IM MW100-01E
Mail Client Setting 2
1.
From the top screen, click Communication Setting > Mail Client Setting 2.
2.
Enter the subject of the e-mail in the Subject box under Mail Header. Up to thirty-two alphanumeric characters can be input.
3.
Enter the sender mail address in the Sender box.
4.
Enter the recipient address in the Recipient 1 box. Enter the address for
Recipient 2 in the same manner. You can specify multiple addresses for each
recipient. Separate each address with a space. You do not have to set both recipients. Use up to 150 alphanumeric characters.
5.
To set up alarm notification, select an address for alarm notification in the Alarm
Notification list. 1_2 sends notification to both recipient 1 and 2.
6.
Enter an alarm notification channel in the Alarm Channel Set box under Alarm
Notification. To add instantaneous values, select the Instantaneous Data check
box. Specify channel numbers by delimiting them with dots as in 001.003.005, or specify a range as in 004-008.
3-33
3.14 Network Utility Settings
7.
To set up notification of data file creation, select a notification address in the File
Creation Notification list.
8.
In the same manner as in step 7, set Media Alarm Notification , Power Failure
Notification , and System Error Notification.
9.
To set up Periodic Report notification, select an address for notification in the
Periodic Report list.
10.
Select transmission interval time from the Interval box under Periodic Report.
11.
Enter a reference time for the send interval in the Time box under Periodic
Report.
12.
To add instantaneous values, select the Instantaneous Data check box under
Periodic Report.
13.
Click the Apply button.
Time Synchronization Client Settings
Enter these settings to automatically synchronize the time.
1.
From the top screen, click Communication Setting > SNTP Client Setting.
2.
Select the SNTP Client Function check box to enable the function.
3.
Enter the name of the NTP server in the Server box under SNTP Server.
4.
Enter the SNTP server port number in the Port box.
5.
Enter a reference time to be queried Time box under Query Action. Next, select a query time interval in the Interval list.
6.
Click the Apply button.
3-34
IM MW100-01E
3.14 Network Utility Settings
Server Settings
These settings enable the various server functions.
Keep Alive Function
Select the TCP Keep Alive check box to enable the function.
Communication Timeout Function
1.
Select the Application Timeout check box to enable the function.
2.
Enter the time in minutes until the timeout in the Timeout box.
Server List Settings
1.
To use a server, turn it ON in the Action box of the corresponding server name.
2.
Enter the port number used by the server in the Port box. Normally, you can use the default setting.
Click the Apply button.
3
IM MW100-01E
3-35
3-36
3.15 Saving and Loading Setup Data
You can save and load MW100 main unit settings.
Saving and Loading Setup Data
From the top screen, click System Setting > Save/Load Setup Data.
Saving Settings
1.
Select SAVE in the Operation list.
2.
Enter a file name in the File Name box, then click the Save/Load button.The
extension cannot be input (it is fixed at PNL). If you enter an existing file name, the existing file is overwritten.
Loading Settings
1.
Select LOAD in the Operation list.
2.
Enter a file name in the File box, then click the Save/Load button.
Setup Data Save Conditions
1.
From the top screen, click System Setting > Save Option Setting.
2.
Select the Channel Setting check box to save.
3.
Select the Recording Setting check box to save.
4.
Select the Communication Setting check box to save.
5.
Select the Other Setting check box to save.
6.
Click the Apply button.
IM MW100-01E
3.16 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
You can monitor-display data measured on the MW100.
The screen consists of Screen display 1 and Screen display 2, and for each you can select trend display, numerical display, meter display, or bar graph display.
Meas. Mode
Monitor-Display of Measured Data
Single Screen
Use this when the monitor contains a single screen. You can display one group.
From the top screen, click Single Screen.
3
Dual Screen
Use this when the monitor contains two screens. You can display two groups.
From the top screen, click Dual Screen.
3-37
IM MW100-01E
3.16 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Explanation of Display Items
This is an explanation of the icons and measured data display items used in the monitor screen.
Record Start/Stop, Computation Start/Stop
Used to start and stop data acquisition.
The icons of all functions are shown in the figure for the sake of explanation, but normally buttons are dimmed when disabled.
• Operation Icons
Computation start/stop button
Starts and stops computation
(/M1 Option)
Recording Start/Stop button
Starts and stops data acquisition.
Pause button
Pauses monitor display updating.
Data acquisition does not stop.
Alarm ACK button
Clears an alarm status hold
Output channel operation icons
(When output modules installed)
Area for displaying manual DO and operation icons for arbitrary output.
Displays one channel’s worth.
Operational status
Illuminates during alarms, recording, and computation.
3-38
Timer reset button
Resets the timer.
Message button
Select a message with the UP/DOWN buttons, then click to write.
Messages are set in advance.
Computation reset/clear button
Resets/clears computation.
(/M1 Option)
Transmission output start/stop button
(When output modules installed)
Collectively starts or stops output on output channels set for transmission output. If both ON and OFF are mixed in the transmission output control settings, the operation stops.
• Output Channel Operation Icons
Manual DO channel:
Channel number switching
Click to switch the channel number
Arbitrary output channel:
Channel number display
Channel number switching
Click to switch the channel number
Relay ON/OFF button
Click to turn relays ON and OFF
Output value display bar
Displays output values in a bar graph. Also, you can click to change the output values.
Channel number display
Changes output value
Click to change the output value.
Output value display
Analog output: V or mA display
PWM Output: % display
Monitor Display Switching and Group Selection
Select the display group
Select the display group you wish to display.
Select a monitor display
Select a monitor display type.
• Meter
• Bar graph
• Numeric value
• Trend
Select background color
Switch background color between white and gray
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
3.16 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Contents of the Status Bar
MW100 serial number
MW100 firmware version
Measurement group recording operation (1 to 3)/ thinning recording operation status (T)
Recording: Yellow
Trigger wait state: Green
Stop state: Gray
Memory capacity of the CF card
Used space (%) displayed with a green bar.
When the CF card is not installed, the not-installed display appears.
MATH processing performance
(/M1 Option)
When computation processing reaches 100%, data loss occurs.
Monitor Display Screen
• Trend Display
Select the waveform display zone
• Auto zone
• Slide zone
• Full zone
• User zone
Measurement interval
Zoom in or out of the time axis
Alarm display ON/OFF
Switch waveform thickness
Select Y-axis display
Alarm indication
ON/OFF
Channel ON/OFF
3
Zone display section ON/OFF
Time axis zoom factor
Selecting the Display Zone of Waveforms
• User Zone
Displays each waveform at the position of the Zone specified in the Display Scale.
The Y-axis displays active channels.
• Full Zone
Each waveform is displayed in the full zone of the waveform display area. The Yaxis displays active channels.
• Slide Zone
Each waveform is displayed slightly staggered across the waveform display area.
The Y-axis displays active channels.
• Auto Zone
The waveform display area is divided up according to the number of displayed waveforms.
3-39
3.16 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
• Numerical Display
Displays measured data as numerical values. When alarms are set, the alarm status is displayed to the left of the numerical value.
Alarm status
Alarm not set up
Illuminated: No alarm occurring
Blinking: Alarm hold clear wait after alarm factor cleared
Illuminated: Alarm occurring
(symbol in circle is alarm type: H/L/rH/rL/dH/dL)
Blinking: Alarm hold clear wait after alarm factor occurrence
• Bar Graph
Displays measured values in a bar graph. When alarms are set, the alarm status is displayed to the left of the bar graph. For information on alarm statuses, see
Numerical Display in this section.
• Meters
Displays measured values in a meter. When alarms are set, the alarm status is displayed to the left of the meter. For information on alarm statuses, see Numerical
Display in this section.
3-40
IM MW100-01E
3.16 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Setting Mode
Display Settings
Tag Settings
Enter Tag names to assign to measurement and MATH channels.
1.
From the top screen, click Display Setting > Channel Tag Setting.
2.
Select the tag number group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
3.
Enter a tag name in the Tag box of each tag number. You can use fifteen alphanumeric characters.
4.
Click the Apply button.
3
Message Settings
You can specify a message to be written along with data saving during recording.
1.
From the top screen, click Display Setting > Message Setting.
2.
Enter the message in the Message box in the Message List. You can use fifteen alphanumeric characters.
3.
Click the Apply button.
IM MW100-01E
3-41
3.16 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Setting Display Colors
1.
From the top screen, click Display Setting > Channel Color Setting.
2.
Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
3.
Select the color you wish to assign in the Color list of each channel. Color samples are shown towards the bottom of the screen
4.
Click the Apply button.
Display Scale Settings
1.
From the top screen, click Display Setting > Group Scale Setting.
2.
Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list.
3.
Select LINEAR or LOG in the Scale list.
4.
Select the number of divisions in the Div list. It can only be selected when set to
LINEAR display. If you select AUTO, the number of divisions is determined automatically from the scale or span of the specified channel.
5.
Select a display position of NORMAL or CENTER in the Bar Graph Type list.
The numerical or bar graph display is updated accordingly.
6.
Specify a percentage from the top or bottom in the Zone boxes. Enter a Lower value of 0 to 95 (%), and an upper value from 5 to 100 (%).
7.
Click the Apply button.
3-42
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
3.16 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Display Groups Settings
1.
From the top screen, click Display Setting > Group Setting.
2.
Select the group you wish to set from the Display Group list.
3.
Enter the group name in the Group Name box (using up to fifteen characters).
4.
Enter the channel numbers you wish to assign to the group in the Channel Set box. Specify channel numbers by delimiting them with dots as in 001.003.005, or specify a range as in 004-008. Up to twenty channels (one hundred characters) can be specified.
5.
Click the Apply button.
3
Trip Line Setting
1.
From the top screen, click Display Setting > Trip Line Setting.
2.
Select the group number you wish to set from the Display Group list.
3.
Turn ON the line you wish to display in the Display list.
4.
Select the color you wish to display in the Color list. Color samples are shown toward the bottom of the screen.
5.
Specify a percentage for the position of the trip line in the Trip Point box. 100% is the scale maximum in the trend display, and 0% is the minimum.
6.
Click the Apply button.
3-43
3.16 Measured Data Monitor Display/Settings
Other Settings
1.
From the top screen, click Display Setting > Other Settings.
2.
Select whether to display channel numbers or tag names in the Channel/No.
Tag Display list.
3.
Click the Apply button.
Setting Mode
Meas. Mode
Log Information
You can display information from the data acquisition log, alarm summaries, and other sources. For information about display contents, see the MW100 Communication
Command manual (IM MW100-17E).
Log Information
1.
From the top screen, click System Setting > Log Information.
2.
Select the type of log you wish to display in the Log Information list. Enter the number of lines to display in the box to the right of the list.
3.
Click the Update button. The updated time is displayed in the display box aligned with the Log Information list, and the updated time current log information is displayed in the log display area.
Log output request time
No. displayed
No. saved
3-44
IM MW100-01E
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting and Maintenance
4.1
Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and
Corrective Actions
The main module has a two-digit 7-segment LED. The 7-segment LED displays the system status. This section describes the displays on the 7-segment LED when errors occur on the system and their corrective actions. For information about normal displays other than for errors, see section 1.3, “Functions of the Main Module.”
If servicing is necessary, or if the instrument is not operating correctly after performing the corrective actions below, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
Errors upon Startup
The left and right digits of the 7-segment LED display “b” and an error code, respectively.
The LED illuminates.
Display Probable Cause Corrective Action Ref. section
b* (where * The dip switch settings Turn OFF the power, remove the CF card, turn ON all dip is any character are not correct.
switches, and power up again. If the situation does not change other than F).
servicing is required.
bF.
1.3
The dip switch settings Powering up in setup reset mode. Turn OFF the power, turn ON 1.3
are not correct.
all dip switches, and power up again. Since all settings such as the IP address are initialized, reconfiguration is necessary.
System Errors
The left and right digits of the 7-segment LED display “F” and an error code, respectively.
The LED illuminates.
F4
F6
FF
Display Possible Problem
F0
F1
F2
F3
System ROM error.
SRAM error
EEPROM error
Error in the internal battery of the main module.
Corrective Action
Servicing required.
Servicing required.
Servicing required.
Servicing required.
However, this error is also displayed immediately after the battery is replaced. If this happens, power-cycle the MW100.
Ethernet controller error
Web file load error
Servicing required.
Servicing required.
Error in writing unit information Servicing required.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Ref. section
Module Errors
The left and right digits of the 7-segment LED display are U and an error code, respectively. The LED illuminates.
In the case of module errors, the error number and the corresponding module number are displayed alternately as shown in the figure below.
Error number Module number
Display Possible Problem
U0 Range information error.
U1
U2
Corrective Action
Servicing required.
Calibration value error.
Check the module’s installation status, then recalibrate the module. If the error occurs even after recalibrating, servicing is required.
Calibration reference voltage Check whether the correct calibration reference voltage is value is not correct.
being applied or whether the channel to which the voltage is
(during calibration) applied is correct.
U3
U4
Error in writing the calibration Servicing required.
value.
The installed module cannot Replace the module with one that can be used.
be used.
IM MW100-01E
-
-
-
-
-
Ref. section
4-1
4
4.1 Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions
Communication Errors
The left and right digits of the 7-segment LED display “C” and an error code, respectively. The LED blinks.
Display
C0
Possible Problem
DHCP address acquisition error
Corrective Action
Check network connections. Use a Fixed IP address
Check with your network administrator whether your environment supports acquisition of addresses by DHCP.
C1 DNS name error Check network connections. Check with your network manager to determine whether your environment supports host name registration.
* See the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual (IM MW180-01E).
Ref. section
2.6, 3.2 *
2.6 *
Settings Errors
E033
E034
E035
E036
E037
E038
E039
E022
E023
E024
E025
E026
E027
E028
E029
E030
E031
E032
The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7-segment LED; in the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right, and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code.
E007
E008
E009
E010
E011
E012
E013
E014
E020
E021
Display Possible Problem
E001
E002
Invalid function parameter.
Value exceeds the setting range.
E003
E004
E005
E006
Incorrect real number format.
Real number value exceeds the setting range.
Incorrect character string.
Character string too long.
Incorrect display color format.
Incorrect date format.
Data value exceeds the setting range.
Incorrect time format.
Time value exceeds the setting range.
Incorrect time zone format.
Time zone value exceeds the setting range.
Incorrect IP address format.
Invalid channel number.
Invalid sequence of first and last channel.
Invalid alarm number.
Invalid relay number.
Invalid sequence of first and last relay.
Invalid MATH group number.
Invalid box number.
Invalid timer number.
Invalid match time number.
Invalid measurement group number.
Invalid module number.
Invalid start and end time of DST.
Invalid display group number.
Invalid tripline number.
Invalid message number.
Invalid user number.
Invalid server type.
Invalid e-mail contents.
Invalid server number.
Invalid command number.
Corrective Action
Enter the correct parameter.
Set a value within the allowable range.
Use the correct real number format.
Set a real number within the allowable range.
Set an allowable character string.
Set a character string within the allowable length.
Specify a display color using the correct format.
Enter the date using the correct format.
Set a date within the allowable range.
Enter the time using the correct format.
Set a time within the allowable range.
Specify a time zone using the correct format.
Set a time zone within the allowable range.
Enter an IP address using the correct format.
Enter the correct channel number.
Set a value for the last channel that is greater than the first channel.
Enter the correct alarm number.
Enter a correct relay number.
Set a value for the last relay that is greater than the first relay.
Enter a correct MATH group number.
Enter the correct box number.
Enter the correct timer number.
Enter the correct match time number.
Enter a correct measurement group number.
Enter a correct module number.
Enter a correct start and end time.
Enter a correct display group number.
Enter a correct tripline number.
Enter a correct message number.
Enter a correct user number.
Enter a correct destination type.
Enter a correct send destination.
Enter a correct server number.
Enter a correct command number.
4-2
IM MW100-01E
4.1 Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions
Display Possible Problem
E040 Invalid client type.
E041
E050
E051
E052
E053
E054
E055
Invalid server type.
Invalid input type.
Module of an invalid input type found in the range of specified channels.
Invalid measuring range.
Corrective Action
Enter a correct client type.
Enter a correct server type.
Enter an input type that can be selected for the module specified by the channel number.
Enter an input type that can be selected for all modules specified by the channel range.
Module of an invalid measuring range found in the range of specified channels.
Enter a measuring range that can be selected for the module specified by the channel number.
Enter a measuring range that can be selected for all modules specified by the channel range.
Upper and lower limits of span cannot be equal.
Set a different value for the upper and lower limits of span.
Upper and lower limits of scale cannot be equal.
Set a different value for the upper and lower limits of scale.
E056
E060
E061
Invalid reference channel number.
Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel.
Cannot set an alarm for a channel on which
MATH function is turned OFF.
Invalid alarm type.
Set channels other than the input module’s own channel.
Set a type for the channel number setting other than SKIP.
Set the Use/Do not Use setting for expressions on the channel number to Use.
Enter an allowed alarm type.
E062
E063
E065
E070
E071
Invalid alarm relay number.
Cannot set hysteresis for a channel on which alarm are turned OFF.
Nonexistent channel specified in MATH expression.
Nonexistent constant specified in MATH expression.
Set a relay number for alarm output relays.
Set the channel number alarm type to something other than
OFF.
Check whether a channel number outside of the allowable range was specified in the expression.
Check whether a MATH constant outside of the allowable range was specified in the expression.
E072
E073
E074
E075
E080
E081
Invalid syntax found in MATH expression.
Too many operators for MATH expression.
Check whether the syntax of the expression is correct.
Invalid order of operators.
Check whether the relationship between the operators used in the expression satisfies proper syntax.
Upper and lower limits of MATH span cannot be Set a different value for the upper and lower limits of the MATH equal.
span.
Incorrect MATH group format.
Incorrect channels for MATH group.
Reduce the number of operators.
Check whether the MATH group format is correct.
Check whether there are any channels outside the allowable range specified in the MATH group.
E082
E090
E091
E092
E093
E094
E095
E100
Too many channels for MATH group.
Incorrect break point format.
Time value of break point exceeds the setting range.
Output value of break point exceeds the setting range.
No break point found.
Invalid time value of first break point.
Invalid time sequence found in break points.
Invalid output type.
Reduce the number of channels specified in the MATH group.
Use the correct break point format.
Set a time within the allowable range.
Set an output value within the allowable range.
E101
E102
E103
E104
E105
E110
Module of an invalid output type found in the range of specified channels.
Invalid output range.
Module of an invalid output range found in the range of specified channels.
Upper and lower limits of output span cannot be equal.
Invalid transmission reference channel.
Invalid channel number for contact input event.
Set one or more break points.
Set the time of break point 1 to zero.
Set the times of break points in ascending order.
Enter an output type that can be selected for the module specified by the channel number.
Enter an output type that can be selected for all modules specified by the channel range.
Enter an output range that can be selected for the module specified by the channel number.
Enter an output range that can be selected for all modules specified by the channel range.
Set a different value for the upper and lower limits of output span.
Set the channel for the input module.
Set the channel number for the universal input module or DI module.
IM MW100-01E
4-3
4
4.1 Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions
4-4
E145
E146
E150
E151
E152
E153
Display Possible Problem
E111 Invalid channel number for alarm event.
E112
E113
E114
E115
Invalid relay number for relay event.
Invalid action type.
Invalid combination of edge and level detection actions.
Invalid combination of level detection actions.
E116
E120
E121
E130
E131
E132
E133
E134
E135
E136
Corrective Action
Set an input module or MATH channel number.
Set the channel number for the DO module.
Enter a correct action type.
Set the edge and level detection types to something different.
Invalid flag number.
Invalid measurement group number.
Invalid measurement group number for MATH interval.
Size of data file for measurement group 1 exceeds the upper limit.
Size of data file for measurement group 2 exceeds the upper limit.
Size of data file for measurement group 3 exceeds the upper limit.
Size of MATH data file exceeds the upper limit.
Set events of different types to different actions in level detection.
Enter a correct flag number.
Set the measurement interval so that meas. gr 1 ≤ meas. gr 2
≤ meas. gr 3. The maximum allowable ch for 10 ms measurement is 10, and for 50 ms, 30.
Set math interval to a measurement group of 100 ms or longer.
When performing measurement by input module, set the measurement group number for executing measurement.
Set the number of saved channels, recording interval, and recording data length so that the data file of measurement group 1 does not exceed 10 MB.
Set the number of saved channels, recording interval, and recording data length so that the data file of measurement group 2 does not exceed 10 MB.
Set the number of saved channels, recording interval, and recording data length so that the data file of measurement group 3 does not exceed 10 MB.
Set the number of saved channels, recording interval, and recording data length so that the MATH data file does not exceed 10 MB.
Size of thinned data file exceeds the upper limit.
Set the number of saved channels, recording interval, and recording data length so that the thinned data file does not exceed 10 MB.
Cannot set smaller value for thinning recording interval than measuring or MATH interval.
Invalid combination of thinning recording, measuring and MATH interval.
Set a value for the thinning recording interval higher than the measurement and MATH interval.
Set a value for the thinning recording interval than is a common multiple of the measurement and MATH intervals.
E137
E138
E139
E140
E141
E142
E160
E165
E166
Cannot set smaller value for thinning recording data length than thinning recording interval.
Set a value for the thinning recording data length that is larger than the thinning recording interval.
Cannot set recording operation for measurement Set the measurement interval of the measurement group group with no measuring interval.
number to something other than OFF.
Invalid recording interval.
Set a recording interval which can be set to the measurement interval of the measurement group.
Upper and lower limits of the display zone cannot Set the upper and lower limits of display zone to a different be equal.
value.
Cannot set smaller value than lower limit of display zone for upper limit.
Set a larger value for the upper limit than that of the lower limit.
Width of display zone must be 5% of that of the entire display or more.
Set the upper and lower limits so that the difference between them is 5% or more.
Incorrect display group format.
Too many channels for display group.
Enter a display group of the correct format.
Set 20 or fewer channels for a single group.
IP address must belong to class A, B, or C.
Net or host part of IP address is all 0’s or 1’s.
Invalid subnet mask.
Invalid gateway address.
Incorrect alarm e-mail channel format.
Invalid channel number for Modbus command.
Invalid combination of start and end channel for
Modbus command.
Set an IP address belonging to class A, B, or C.
Set a valid combination of IP address and subnet mask.
Enter a setting according to your network.
Make sure that the net part of the IP address and default gateway match.
Specify a channel using the correct format.
Enter a correct channel.
Set the first and last channel to the same type.
IM MW100-01E
4.1 Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions
Display Possible Problem
E167 Invalid sequence of start and end channel for
Modbus command.
E168 Too many channels for command number.
Corrective Action
Set the last channel equal or greater than the first channel.
Set a valid number of channels for the data type.
Execution Error
The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7-segment LED; in the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right, and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code.
E211
E212
E213
E214
E215
E221
Display Possible Problem
E201 Cannot execute due to different operation mode.
Corrective Action
Confirm the operation mode.
E202
E203
Cannot execute when in setting mode.
Cannot execute when in measurement mode.
Change the mode before execution.
Change the mode before execution.
E204
E205
E206
E207
Cannot change or execute while saving to memory. Stop the save operation before executing.
Cannot execute during MATH operation.
Stop the MATH operation before executing.
Cannot change or execute during MATH operation. Stop the MATH operation before executing.
Cannot change or execute while saving/loading settings.
Execute after the settings are saved or loaded.
E222
E223
No relays for communication input found.
Initial balance failed.
No channels for initial balance found.
No channels for transmission output found.
No channels for arbitrary output found.
No measurement channels found.
Invalid measurement interval.
Too many measurement channels.
Check installation of relays and the relay output types.
Check the wiring.
Check the target channels.
Specify channels for transmission output.
Specify channels for arbitrary output.
Check the measurement module, measurement group number, measurement interval, and other settings.
Set the measurement interval so that: Meas. gr 1 ≤ meas. gr 2
≤ meas. gr 3
The number of measurable channels during 10 ms measurement is 10, and for 50 ms measurement, 30.
E224
E225
E226
E227
No MATH channels found.
Invalid MATH interval.
Cannot start/stop MATH operation.
Cannot start/stop recording.
Check the MATH channel settings.
Set the MATH interval to measurement groups of 100 ms or more. When measuring with measurement modules, set the measurement group numbers on which to perform measurement.
Cannot execute because MATH start is set for the level detection action.
Cannot execute because MATH start is set for the level detection action.
Execution Errors
The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7-segment LED; in the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right, and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code.
Display Possible Problem
E301 CF card error detected.
E302
E303
No enough free space on CF card.
CF card is write-protected.
Corrective Action
Do not eject or otherwise disturb the card while being accessed.
Delete unneeded files to free up space. Replace the CF card.
Check write permissions.
E311
E312
E313
E314
CF card not inserted.
Cannot format CF card.
CF card damaged or not formatted.
File is write-protected.
Insert the CF card.
Check the CF card.
Reinsert the CF card or format it.
Check write permissions.
E315 No such file or directory.
Check the files and folders. *
* May occur in the MW100 internal processing (during an abnormality)
IM MW100-01E
4-5
4
4.1 Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions
Display Possible Problem
E316 Number of files exceeds the upper limit.
E317
E318
E319
Invalid file or directory name.
Unknown file type.
Same name of file or directory already exists.
Corrective Action
Delete unneeded files to reduce the number of files.
Check the files and folders. *
Check the files.
Check the files and folders. *
E320
E321
E331
E332
E341
Invalid file or directory operation.
File is in use.
Setting file not found.
Setting file is broken.
Check the files and folders. *
Wait until access is finished.
Check the name of the setting file.
Could not load setting file because it is corrupted.
E342
E343
E344
E345
FIFO buffer overflow.
You must reduce the time required to store files.
Delete unneeded files to free up space.
Check the settings.
Data to be saved to file not found.
Power failed while opening file.
Could not restart recording after recovery from power outage.
Files may have been damaged.
Take appropriate action for power failure.
Some or all data prior to power outage could not Do not change the CF card during a power failure.
be recovered.
Perform the record start operation.
E346 Recording could not be started due to power outage.
Perform the re-recording start operation.
Take appropriate action for power failure.
* May occur in the MW100 internal processing (during an abnormality)
Communication Command Error
The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7-segment LED; in the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right, and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code.
E402
E403
E404
E405
E406
E407
Display
E401
Possible Problem
Command string too long.
Corrective Action
Keep the command within 2047 Bytes from first character to terminator.
Too many commands enumerated.
Invalid type of commands enumerated.
Invalid command.
Not allowed to execute this command.
Set the number of enumerated commands within 99.
Send the commands without enumerating them.
Confirm the command name.
Login at a level that allows execution of this command.
Cannot execute due to different operation mode.
Switch to a mode that allows execution of this command.
Invalid number of parameters.
Check the number of parameters.
E408
E411
E412
E413
E414
Parameter string too long.
Daylight saving time function not available.
Temperature unit selection not available.
MATH option not available.
Serial communication interface option not available.
Keep the length of individual parameters within 512 Bytes.
Not available with the current model.
Not available with the current model.
Not available with the current model.
Not available with the current model.
4-6
IM MW100-01E
4.1 Error Display on the 7-Segment LED and Corrective Actions
Communication Error
The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7-segment LED; in the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right, and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code.
Display Possible Problem
E501 Login first.
E502
E503
E504
E505
Login failed, try again.
Connection count exceeded the upper limit.
Connection has been lost.
Connection has time out.
E520
E521
FTP function not available.
FTP control connection failed.
E530
E531
E532
E550
E551
SMTP function not available.
SMTP connection failed.
POP3 connection failed.
SNTP function not available.
SNTP command/response failed.
Corrective Action
First, finish logging in.
Enter the correct user name and password.
Close unneeded connections and reconnect.
Try to make a new connection.
Try to make a new connection.
Enable the function.
Check the FTP server address and the main unit address setting. Also check the Ethernet cable cannection.
Enable the function.
Check the SMTP server address and the main unit address setting. Also check the Ethernet cable cannection.
Check the POP3 server address and the main unit address setting. Also check the Ethernet cable cannection.
Enable the function.
Check the SNTP server address and the main unit address setting. Also check the Ethernet cable cannection.
System Errors
The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7-segment LED; in the first part, the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right, and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code.
Display Possible Problem
E999 System error.
Corrective Action
Servicing required.
4
IM MW100-01E
4-7
4-8
4.2
Error Display in the Monitor Screen and
Corrective Actions
Error Message
Could not connect to the instrument.
Check cables and other connections.
Corrective Action
Check Ethernet cable connections and the IP addresses of devices.
Communication error occurred.
Check cables and other connections.
The actually installed modules differ from the modules recognized by the system.
The size of the data files exceeds the allowable upper limit.
Check Ethernet cable connections and the IP addresses of devices.
Reconstruct the module configuration.
Set the number of save channels, recording interval, and recording data length so that the data files of measurement groups 1, 2, and 3, and the computed and thinned data files are all within 10 MB.
Value smaller than measuring interval or MATH interval cannot be set for the thinning recording interval.
Set a value higher than the measurement and MATH interval.
Combination of thinning recording interval, measurement Set the thinning recording interval so that it is a common multiple of interval, MATH interval incorrect.
the measurement and MATH intervals.
The recording data length cannot be set equal to or less Set a recording data length larger than the recording interval.
than the recording interval.
Insufficient space on the CF card.
Delete unneeded files on the CF card to free up some space.
Replace the CF card.
The CF card is not inserted.
The CF card is damaged or not formatted.
Insert the CF card.
Reinsert the CF card or format it.
No data found in file.
Remove MATH start/stop action from the Event/Action settings.
Check the recording settings.
Remove MATH start/stop action from the Event/Action settings.
Remove recording start/stop action from the Event/Action Remove recording start/stop action from the Event/Action settings.
settings.
IM MW100-01E
4.3
Troubleshooting
If servicing is necessary, or if the instrument is not operating correctly after performing the corrective actions below, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
The 7-segment LED does not illuminate.
Possible Problem
The power switch is not ON.
The supply voltage is too low.
The fuse is blown.
The power supply is broken.
The 7-segment LED blinks repeatedly.
Possible Problem
The power supply is shorted inside the input/output module.
The power supply is shorted inside the main module.
Corrective Action
Turn ON the power switch.
Ref. section
2.5
Check whether the voltage is within the supply voltage 2.5
rating range.
Servicing required.
Servicing required.
-
-
Corrective Action
Remove the input/output module one by one and determine thebroken module (servicing required).
Replace the main module. (Servicing required.)
Ref. section
2.3
2.3
The MW100 cannot be detected from the PC or cannot be detected with the Search button.
Possible Problem
The LINK LED does not turn ON.
The cable is broken.
The LINK LED does not turn ON.
There is a problem with the hub.
The LINK LED does not turn ON.
There is a problem with the PC.
Corrective Action
Replace the Ethernet cable.
Check the hub’s power supply. If it still does not work, replace the hub and check the hub’s operation.
Check whether the PC can connect to the network.
Replace the PC’s NIC.
The ACT LED does not turn ON.
Check the hub’s power supply. If it still does not work,
There is a problem in the connection between Replace the hub and check the hub’s operation.
the hub and the MW100.
The ACT LED does not turn ON.
There is a problem with the PC.
There is a problem in the network configuration.
The settings are not correct.
Check whether the PC can connect to the network.
Replace the PC’s NIC.
Check that the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway settings on the MW100 are correct.
There is a problem in the network configuration.
The setting changes have not taken effect.
The PC and the MW100 are not in the same segment.
Turn OFF the power to the PC and the MW100, and carry out reconnection.
Connect the PC and the MW100 in the same network segment. If the PC and the MW100 are connected as shown in the following figure, the Search button cannot be used to detect the MW100. You can make the connection by manually specifying the IP address of the
MW100.
MW
Network A
Ref. section
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
*
*
*
Router
Network B
PC
The firewall is enabled (when using Windows XP). Disable the function.
* See the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual.
4-9
IM MW100-01E
4
4.3 Troubleshooting
The MW100 can be detected using the Search button, but browser connection fails.
Possible Problem
The IP address is set to the default value.
The default value cannot be used to make the connection.
There is a problem in the network configuration.
Corrective Action
Enter the correct IP address.
Check that the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway settings on the MW100 are correct.
* See the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual.
The Calibrator cannot connect to the MW100.
Possible Problem
Attempting to make multiple connections.
* See the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual.
Corrective Action
Exit all other software programs.
The connected input/output module is not detected.
Possible Problem
Module connection or module startup error.
Attached the module while the power was ON.
Carried out an incorrect calibration.
* See the MW100 Viewer Software User’s Manual.
Corrective Action
Turn OFF the power. Detach the input/output module once and attach it again.
Recalibrate.
Ref. section
*
*
Ref. section
4.3,*
Ref. section
2.5
4.3,*
4-10
IM MW100-01E
4.3 Troubleshooting
The measured value is not correct
Possible Problem
The input wiring is not correct.
The measured value is at +Over or –Over.
The measurement range setting and input range do not match.
The temperature error is large or is unstable.
The TC type setting and the type actually
connected are different.
The temperature error is large or is unstable.
The RJC setting is not correct.
The temperature error is large or is unstable.
The wind is hitting the terminals.
The temperature error is large or is unstable.
The ambient temperature change is drastic.
The temperature error is large or is unstable.
There is an error in the wiring resistance
(in the case of a 3-wire RTD).
Corrective Action
Check the input wiring.
Change to an appropriate setting.
Change to the correct setting.
Change to the correct setting.
Block the wind from hitting the terminals.
Suppress changes in the ambient temperature such as by inserting it into a box.
Match the thickness and length of the three wires.
-
-
Ref. section
2.4
3.5
3.5
3.5
2.4
The measurement error is large or is unstable.
Noise effects.
The measurement error is large or is unstable.
Effects from the signal source resistance.
The temperature error is large or is unstable.
Effects from parallel connections.
Measured value from strain gauge type sensor not correct.
On the strain module (-B12, -B35), the gauge method and dip switch settings are not correct.
On the strain module (-B12, -B35), the gauge resistance and internal bridge resistance values are different
Take measures against noise.
Reduce the signal source resistance such as by inserting a converter.
Stop parallel connections.
Do not use the burnout setting.
When using a sensor without a remote sensing wire, use the DV450-001 (conversion cable).
Enter the correct settings.
Use a module that supports the resistance value of the strain gauge (120
Ω
, -B12; for 350
Ω
, -B35).
On the strain module, scaling corresponding to the gauge method is not set (for 2 gauge and
Displayed with 1 gauge method conversion.
Set scaling appropriately depending on the gauge
4 gauge methods, the amount of strain is doubled method.
or quadrupled.)
On the strain module (-NDI), a strain gauge type When using a sensor without a remote sensing wire, sensor without a remote sensing wire is being use the DV450-001 (conversion cable).
used.
-
-
-
2.10
2.4
2.4
1.7
2.4
Alarms are not output.
Possible Problem
There is a problem in the alarm setting.
Corrective Action
Both the alarm and output relay must be set appropriately.
Make the alarm and output relay settings appropriate.
Ref. section
3.7, 3.8
The CF card is not detected.
Possible Problem
There is a problem with the CF card.
Corrective Action
Replace the CF card.
Eject and format the CF card, then insert it again.
Ref. section
2.11
4
IM MW100-01E
4-11
4-12
4.4
Calibration
To maintain measuring accuracy, we recommend calibration once per year. Calibration of the instrument requires a calibration instrument of the necessary accuracy and resolution. Please consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument.
Range Calibration for DC Voltage, RTD, Resistance, Strain, and Analog Output
Required Instruments
• DC Voltage/Current Standard
Must meet the following specifications (M/9100 by FLUKE or equivalent)
Output range: 20 mV to 100 V
Output accuracy of output range: ± (0.01%+1 µ V) or less
• Resistance standard
Must meet the following specifications (ADR3204 by Alpha Electronics or equivalent)
Resistance setting range: 0.1 to 3000 Ω
Resistance accuracy of resistance setting range: ± (0.01%+2m Ω ) or less
Resolution: 0.001 Ω
• Bridge head (Yokogawa Electric 319300)
• Digital multimeter
Must meet the following specifications (7562 by Yokogawa or equivalent)
Accuracy: ± 0.01% or less
Calibration Procedure
1.
Wire the standard and instrument to be calibrated as shown in the figure below.
2.
Turn ON the power while holding down user function key 1 on the MW100. The unit enters Calibration mode.
3.
Allow a sufficient warm-up time for the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit (thirty minutes or more).
4.
Confirm that the ambient temperature and humidity meet the standard operating conditions.
5.
After setting up communications between the PC and the MW100, start the
MW100 Calibration software and perform calibration.
For instructions on the calibration software, see the MW100 Viewer Software
User’s Manual (IM MW180-01E).
6.
To exit Calibration mode, turn the power OFF.
Wiring Diagram
• When calibrating the DC voltage range of the 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input module
When calibrating 0 V When calibrating a range other than 0 V
100Vpk MAX TO
250V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
100Vpk MAX TO
250V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
Input terminal
+
Short
–
* Carry out calibration for each input terminal.
Input terminal
+
–
Hi
Lo
DC voltage/current standard
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
4.4 Calibration
• When calibrating the RTD range of the 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input module
When calibrating 0
Ω
When calibrating a range other than 0
Ω
100Vpk MAX TO
250V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
100Vpk MAX TO
250V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
Input terminal
A
B
Short b
Input terminal
A
B b
* Carry out calibration for each input terminal.
Make the resistance of three lead wires equal.
Resistance standard
H
L
G
• When calibrating the DC voltage range of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input module
100Vpk MAX TO
120V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
4
Short the input terminal of CH1 (apply 0 V)
+
–
+
–
Input terminal of CH2
Hi
Lo
DC voltage/current standard
• When calibrating the RTD range of the 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input module
100Vpk MAX TO
120V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
Short the input terminal of CH3 (connect 0
Ω
)
A
B
A
B b
Make the resistance of three lead wires equal.
b
When calibrating the RTD (1 mA) 600 mV range, connect 300
Ω
to the input terminal of CH5.*
* When calibrating the RTD (1 mA) 60 mV range, connect 60
Ω
to the input terminal of CH6.
When calibrating the RTD (1 mA) 200 mV range, connect 200
Ω
to the input terminal of CH4.
Resistance standard
H
L
G
4-13
4.4 Calibration
• When calibrating the DC voltage range of the 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD
Input module
-
B
C
8
9
6
7
12
-
B
13
C
14
15
10
11
100Vpk MAX + TO -
50V MAX CH TO CH(RTD-OHM)
600V MAX TO CAT II
1 1
-
B
2
3 CH4
+
A
-
B
2
3 CH1
C
4
5
C
4
5
CH5
CH6
+
A
-
B
6
7
C
8
9
+
A
-
B
12
13
10
11
C
14
15
CH2
CH3
+
–
Short the input terminal of CH1 (apply 0 V)
+
–
Hi
Lo
Input terminal of CH2
DC voltage/current standard
• When calibrating the RTD or resistance range of the 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire
RTD Resistance Input module
4-14
Resistance standard
I
A
B
C
I
A
B
C
Short the input terminal of CH3 (connect 0
Ω
)
When calibrating the RTD (1 mA)
20 mV range, connect 20
Ω
to the input terminal of CH4.*
* When calibrating the RTD (1 mA) 60 mV range, connect 60
Ω
to the input terminal of CH5.
When calibrating the RTD (1 mA) 200 mV range, connect 200
Ω
to the input terminal of CH6.
When calibrating the RTD (1 mA) 600 mV range, connect 300
Ω
to the input terminal of CH4.
When calibrating the RTD (0.25 mA) 600 mV range, connect 2400
Ω
to the input terminal of CH5.
When calibrating the RTD (0.25 mA) 1 V range, connect 3000
Ω
to the input terminal of CH6.
• When calibrating the range of the 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Module (-B12, -B35, and -NDI)
The clamp terminal (-B12, -B35) and NDIS terminal (-NDI) are connected with the 4gauge method (see next page). Use a resistance of 120
Ω
for resistors R1 through
R3, and connect a resistance to R4 equivalent to the Zero or Full value.
To correctly calibrate the range, do so in the order Zero, then Full.
ZERO
Calibration range Resistors R4
ZERO
2000 µ STR
20000 µ STR
200000 µ STR
120.000
120.000 Ω
120.000
Ω
Ω
120.000 Ω
FULL
Resistor R4 Resistance value accuracy
120.000
Ω
117.154 Ω
±
±
0.005%,
0.005%,
±
±
0.3 ppm/
0.3 ppm/
°
°
C
C
113.010 Ω
80.000 Ω
± 0.005%, ± 0.3 ppm/ ° C
± 0.005%, ± 0.3 ppm/ ° C
* The Full calibration value of the 2000 µ Strain range is equivalent to 12000 µ Strain
The Full calibration value of the 20000 µ Strain range is equivalent to 30000 µ Strain
The Full calibration value of the 200000 µ Strain range is equivalent to 200000 µ Strain
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
4.4 Calibration
For -B12, -B35
Jumper setting switch (CH1 to CH4)
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
OFF
ON
No.1
OFF
No.2
OFF
No.3
OFF
No.4
OFF
No.5
ON
R1
A(+)
R2
B(L)
R4
C(-V)
R3
D(H)
10
11
12
13
6
7
8
9
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
Connect CH2 only
For -NDI
R1 R3
Connect CH2 only
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
R2 R4
Bridge head (319300)
• When calibrating the output range of the 8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog Output module
All eight channels are calibrated at Zero (0 V) and Full (10 V).
4
Digital multimeter
H
L
10
11
12
13
6
7
8
9
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
4-15
4.4 Calibration
Calibration of Temperature Measurements using Thermocouples
Required Instruments
• DC Voltage/Current Standard
Must meet the following specifications (5520A by FLUKE or equivalent):
Output accuracy: ± (0.005%+1 µ V) or less
• 0 ° C reference temperature device
Must meet the following specifications (ZC-114/ZA-10 by Coper Electronics or equivalent)
Standard temperature stability accuracy:
±
0.05
°
C or less
Reference Junction Compensation of Thermocouple Input
Normally, the input terminal of the universal input module is nearly at room temperature, so the actual thermocouple output differs from the value in the table for the thermoelectromotive force of the 0 ° C standard. The universal input module measures the temperature of the input terminal and compensates by applying a corresponding thermoelectromotive force to the actual thermocouple output. Therefore, when the measurement terminal is shorted (equivalent to the case when the detector tip is 0 ° C), the measured value indicates the temperature of the input terminal.
When calibrating the universal input module, this compensation voltage
(thermoelectromotive force of the 0 ° C standard corresponding to the input terminal temperature) must be subtracted from the output of the standard generator before application. As shown in the figure, by using the 0 ° C standard temperature device to compensate the reference junction at 0 ° C, you can input the 0 ° C thermoelectromotive force from the DC voltage standard and perform the calibration.
Wiring Diagram
Copper wires
Thermocouple wires or
TC extension wires
4-CH, High-Speed Universal
Input Module*
100Vpk MAX TO
250V MAX CH TO CH
600V MAX TO
* Make a similar
connection in the
case of a 10-CH,
Medium-Speed
Universal Input
Module.
4-16
Input terminal
+
–
+
-
DC voltage standard
Copper wires
Thermocouple wires
Cold junction
0
°
C standard temperature device
Note
• Calibration of temperature measurements of the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit using thermocouples differs from calibration of DC voltage and RTD ranges in that the input cannot be adjusted. If the temperature measurement calibration using thermocouples does not meet the accuracy specifications, check thoroughly for input error and other problems, then contact your Yokogawa dealer or representative.
• If errors exist in the thermocouple wires and TC extension wires, correct calibration is not possible. Be sure to use a calibrated thermocouple.
IM MW100-01E
4.5
Parts and Maintenance
This instrument does not have parts that need periodic replacement.
However the main module (model: MW100) has wearable parts listed below. Also, the aluminum electrolytic capacitors below are included with each input/output module.
There is no replacement service for the parts listed.
If you are to use the MW100 for an extended time, repair or replace the main module according to the service life of the parts and taking into consideration the actual usage conditions.
Part Name
Lithium battery
Lifespan
Approx. 10 years
Aluminum electrolytic Approx. 10 years capacitor
Remarks
When used under standard operating conditions.
One battery is used.
When used under standard operating conditions.
The main module and PWM output module have fuses. These fuses cannot be replaced by the user. If the fuse blows, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
Installed Module
Main module AC power supply
Main module DC power supply
PWM module
Rating
Maximum rated voltage: 250 V; maximum rated current: 3.15 A
Type: Timelag (T)
Maximum rated voltage: 250 V; maximum rated current: 6.3 A
Type: Timelag (T)
Maximum rated voltage: 250 V; maximum rated current: 3.15 A
Type: Timelag (T)
4
4-17
IM MW100-01E
4-18
4.6
System Initialization
Perform this procedure to initialize the settings on the MW100. The following types of initialization are available.
Initialization Type
Type
Initialization using dip switches
Initialization using communication commands
Level
----
0
1
Items Initialized
All settings
Setting other than configurated module information
Setting other than the following item;
IP address, host name, subnet mask, default gateway, baud rate, parity bit, stop bit, data length, handshake and configurated module infomation.
Initialization Procedure
Using Dip Switches
1.
Turn OFF the power to the MW100.
2.
Check that the switch 5 of dip switch 1 on the main module is OFF.
3.
Turn OFF the power to the MW100.
After the 7-segment LED indicates the power ON self check, bF is displayed.
4.
Check the status of step 3, then turn the power OFF.
5.
Turn switch 5 of dip switch 1 ON.
Initialization using communication commands
Using a Browser
For information about initialization using communication command, see the MW100
Communication Command manual (IM MW100-17E).
1.
From the top screen, click System Settings > Module Information under the
Top item.
2.
Select the initialization level from the Initialization Level box under System information.
3.
Click the Initialize button. Initialization is performed.
For information on the initialization operating screens, see section 3.3, “System
Settings.”
IM MW100-01E
Chapter 5 Specification
5.1
Common Specifications
Normal Operating Conditions
Rated power supply voltage: AC power supply (with or without AC adapter): 100 to 240 VAC
DC power supply: 12 to 28 VDC
Supply voltage range used: AC power supply (with or without AC adapter): 100 to 250 VAC
DC power supply: 10 to 32 VDC
Power supply frequency: 50 Hz ± 2%, 60 Hz ± 2%
Power consumption: AC power, or DC power with AC adapter: Approx. 70 VA max.
DC power supply: Approx. 35 VA max.
* When any six I/O modules are installed
10 to 60 Hz 0.2m/s
2
or less Vibration:
Shock:
Magnetic field:
Position:
Not allowed
400 A/m or less (50/60 Hz)
Position horizontally with feet down
Not explosion-proof Structure:
Usage location:
Operating altitude:
Overvoltage category:
Measurement category:
Pollution degree:
Indoors
2,000 m or less
II (per IEC61010-1 CSA22.2 No. 61010-1)
II (per IEC61010-1 CSA22.2 No. 61010-1)
2 (per IEC61010-1 CSA22.2 No. 61010-1)
Transport and Storage Conditions
Environmental conditions during transport and storage:
Ambient storage temperature : –25 to 70 ° C
Ambient storage humidity: 5% to 95% RH (no condensation)
Vibration:
Shock:
10 to 60 Hz 4.9m/s
2
or less
392 m/s
2
or less (packaged condition)
Mechanical Specifications (Excluding AC Adapter)
External dimensions: Approx. 455 × 131 × 159 mm (when six slots are attached)
Weight: Approx. 4.3 kg (maximum total weight)
Installation method: Desktop or floor, panel mount, or attached to a DIN rail
Material: Steel plate, aluminum die-cast, molded plastic resin
Standards Compliance
CSA:
UL:
CE:
CSA22.2 No 61010-1, overvoltage category II, measurement category II, pollution degree 2
Conforms to UL61010B-1 (CSA NRTL/C)
EMC directive; EN61326
EN61000-3-2
EN61000-3-3
Low voltage directive; EN61010-1; overvoltage category II, measurement category II,
C-Tick: pollution degree 2
Conforms with AS/NZS CISPR11 Class A Group1
Overvoltage category II: An index for defining transient overvoltages (includes the rated impulse withstand voltage, and applies to electrical equipment supplied with power from fixed installations such as a
Pollution degree 2: distribution board).
The degree of adherence by a solid, liquid, or vapor that reduces the withstand voltage or surface resistance factor
(applies only to normal indoor atmospheres (with nonconductive pollution).
Measurement category II: For measurements performed on circuits directly connected to the electrical distribution system such as provided by a wall outlet.
IM MW100-01E
5-1
5
5-2
5.2
Main Module Specifications
Measurement
Style number: S2
Measurement range and accuracy:
See the measurement range and accuracy given in the specifications of each input module.
Maximum number of inputs:
60 inputs (however, only up to six modules can be controlled)
Measurement interval: Select from 10, 50, 100, 200, 500 ms, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30, or 60 s.
Up to three intervals defined for the input modules can be set
(multi-interval)
Also, the following limitations apply to the measurement interval and number of measurement channels.
Measurement Interval
10 ms
10 ms and 50 ms mixed.
50 ms
Number of measurable channels
10
10
30
Synchronization between modules:
Synchronized within the same sampling interval (in the same unit)
Synchronization between channels:
4-CH, High-Speed Universal Module and Digital Input Module:
Synchronized between channels
10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module, Six-Channel
Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module, and the
Filter function:
4-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module: Due to the scanner type, not synchronized between channels
First-Order Lag Filter
Applicable measurement types: For each channel of DC voltage, thermocouple, RTD, strain, and resistance, you can select a time constant (time until 63.2% of the output value is reached) corresponding to the sampling interval indicated in the table below.
Time constant = measurement interval × N (where N = 5, 10, 20,
25, 40, 50, or 100)
0.01
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
1
2
5
10
20
30
60
Measurement Interval (s) Selectable Time Constants (s)
25
50
100
150
300
1
2.5
5
10
N=5 N=10 N=20 N=25 N=40 N=50 N=100
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.25
0.4
0.5
1
0.25
0.5
0.5
1
1
2
1.25
2.5
2
4
2.5
5
5
10
2
5
10
20
4
10
20
40
5
12.5
25
50
8
20
40
80
10
25
20
50
50 100
100 200
50 100
100 200
200 400
300 600
125
250
500
750
200
400
800
1200
250
500
1000
1500
500
1000
2000
3000
600 1200 1500 2400 3000 6000
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
MATH
Differential computation between channels:
Differential computation between arbitrary channels (DCV, TC,
Linear scaling:
RTD, DI, strain, resistance)
Scalable ranges: DCV, TC, RTD, DI, strain, resistance
Scaling range: –30000 to 30000
Scaling display range: –32000 to 32000
Decimal point position: Arbitrary
Units: Can be arbitrarily set using up to six characters
MATH Function Specifications (/M1 Option)
The following MATH functions can be added with options.
Number of MATH channels: 60 (can also be used for communication input)
Computation start/stop: communication commands).
Reset/clear computed values: Executes resetting/clearing of the computed values according to the Event/Action function, or requests via communication commands or monitor settings.
Group reset:
Number of channels for communication input: 240
Execution of computation starts and stops according to user commands (Start/Stop key, Event/Action function, or
Calculations:
Only the MATH channels set by group, up to seven groups, are reset by the Event/Action function. Can be executed using the Event/Action function.
Basic math (+, –, × , ÷ , exponentiation)
Relational operators (>, ≥ , =, ≤ , <, ≠ )
Logical operators (AND, OR, XOR, NOT)
Arithmetic operators (SQR, ABS, LOG, EXP)
TLOG computations (max, min, max-min, average, integration, pulse integration)
CLOG computations (max, min, max-min, average)
Conditional expressions ([EXPR1?EXPR2:EXPR3])
MATH reference channels: Measurement channel
MATH channels*
Communication input channels
MATH interval:
Decimal place setting:
Computation range:
Flag input channels
MATH constant
Program channels
* If an expression refers to its own channel or a channel of a larger number than its own channel, the data from the previous MATH interval is used.
Specify one from among the measurement group numbers, and perform computation. However, measurement intervals of 10 ms or 50 ms cannot be specified.
Characters used in expressions:
Up to 120 per channel
For communication input channels only, a maximum of 8 characters can be used per channel.
Number of stacks:
Conditional expression:
35 or fewer per expression
Other expressions can be nested in conditional expressions.
Conditional expressions can be nested together.
Operators cannot be used to combine conditional expressions.
MATH span: When displaying waveforms on the Web, set the upper and lower limit values.
The setting range is –9,999,999 to 99,999,999.
0 to 4
A given result during computation must be within
±
3.4
×
10
38
.
IM MW100-01E
5-3
5
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Math output value: Data output by the computation (for binary output)
Data Type
–9,999,999-99,999,999
2,147,450,879 (7FFF7FFFh)
–2,147,385,343 (80018001h)
–2,147,319,806 (80028002h)
Description
Normal output range
Plus over
Minus over
Skip
* If the computation fails, the previous value is output.
MATH constants: 60
Precision: Mantissa, 5 digits; exponent, 2 digits
Range: –9.9999E+29 to –1.0000E-30,0,1.0000E-30 to
9.9999E+29
Communication input channels: 300
Numerical values in expressions can be substituted using
Flag input channels: 60
Flag value can be substituted in computational expressions.
Range: 0, 1
Varies according to the operation of the Event/Action function.
Program channels: communication input.
Precision: Mantissa, 5 digits; exponent, 2 digits
Range: –9.9999E+29 to –1.0000E-30,0,1.0000E-30 to
9.9999E+29
3
Broken line data can be input into expressions.
Setting is possible of up to 32 points of the time from the start point and the output value at that point. Straight lines can link those specified points, and the values at each elapsed time are output.
No. of set points: 32
Elapsed time from start point: 0 to 86400 sec.
Start point time: Fixed at 0
Limitation on specification of elapsed time: Only 1 output value per specified time allowed
Output values: –30000 to 30000
MATH alarm function: Four levels per channel
Type: Upper limit and lower limit only. No hysteresis function available.
Loss of computed data: In the monitor screen, when the MATH performance meter exceeds 100%, some computations at each MATH interval cannot be completed, and loss of computed data occurs. When this happens, the previous computed value is held. If computation loss occurs frequently, lengthen the MATH interval to reduce the load. To stop computation promptly, press the Stop key on the main module.
When the volume of computations is high:
Display updating on the monitor screen, response to computation stop operations, and other behavior may be slow. To stop computation promptly, press the Stop key on the main module.
5-4
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Operation after power failure:
If a power failure occurs during a computation, the value computed just before the power failure is recalled after recovery, and computation starts using that value.
Type
MATH channel data
Communication input channel data
Flag input channel data
Program channel data
Value after power failure recovery
Holds previous value
Holds previous value
Holds previous value
Holds elapsed time and previous value
Remote RJC
When the item to be measured is located at a great distance, you can setup relay terminals near the item, measure between the relay terminal and the input terminal of the universal input module (reference channel) using thermocouples, and use the resultant value as the reference junction compensation of the temperature measurement.
However, the same thermocouple type is used for reference channels and measured channels.
Alarms
Alarm types: Upper limit, lower limit, differential upper limit, differential lower limit, high limit on rate of change, low limit on rate of change
Number of settings: Four levels per channel
ON/OFF can be set for each channel and level
Alarm setting range: DCV, TC, RTD, DI, strain, resistance, scaling and remote RJC
Hysteresis: Alarm OFF value arbitrarily set
Number of alarm outputs:
10 to 60 outputs (10 points per DO module)
Output mode:
Alarm ACK:
Energize/De-energize, AND/OR, Hold/Non-hold
If set to hold using the alarm status or relay output Hold/Non-hold, the hold status is cleared.
Alarm update interval: 100 ms (not synchronized with the measurement interval)
Recorder Structure
Measured values, computed values, thinned values, setting values, data acquisition logs, and alarm summaries can be saved to CF card as a recording action.
Folders for each file type are created on the CF card, and files are saved in them.
CONFIG:
DATA:
DATAnnnn:
Folder for storing the setting value file
DATAnnnn storage folder
The folder management file MWFOLDER.INF is created in the
DATA folder. The file contains the latest folder numbers, and should not be deleted. If a DATA folder is deleted, a new folder is created starting with DATA0000.
Folder for storing measured values, computed values, thinned values, data acquisition logs, and alarm summaries.
“nnnn” is automatically generated from 0000 to 9999
Recording of Measured/Computed Values
Measured and computed values can be saved by measurement group to the CF card.
Supported external media:
CF card Type II
×
1 slot (Type I can be used)
Max. card size: 2 GB
IM MW100-01E
5-5
5
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Record start/stop: Starts and stops recording to CF card per the START and STOP keys, Event/Action function, or communication commands.
Recording operation: Separate files created for each measurement group, and measured and computed data is saved to CF card.
For each measurement group, you can select whether or not to perform the save operation.
Measurement groups: Measurement channels can be divided into up to 3 groups by module. The measurement interval must be the same for all
Write mode:
Triggers: channels in the group.
Single, Full Stop, Rotate
You can set the recording stop operation by measurement group.
If free space cannot be secured or when securing of free space takes extended time, an error is indicated on the 7-segment LED.
For details, see chapter 4.1, “Media Related Errors.”
Direct, Trigger
You can set the recording start action by measurement group.
Pretrigger function: The pretrigger when write start is triggered can be set for each measurement group from 0 to 100% in 10% intervals.
Pretrigger length: When there are fewer than ten data, the pretrigger length is rounded up.
When there are ten or more data, the pretrigger length is rounded down.
Ex.) Recording interval 600 second, data length 1 hour, pritrigger 30 %
Number of data in a file: 1 hour / 600 sec = 6
Pritrigger length = 6
×
30 / 100 = 1.8 about 2 files
Posttriger length = 6 - 2 = 4
Recording channels: You can specify, common to all measurement groups, whether to
Recording interval: record on each channel. However, the number of recording channels is limited by the measurement interval as follows:
1500 ch/sec. or less
Ex.) Measurement group 1 Recording interval 10 ms, 10 ch
Measurement group 2 Recording interval 100 ms, 50 ch
(1s / 0.01s)
×
10ch + (1s / 0.1s)
×
50ch = 1500 ch/sec.
Set the recording interval for each measurement group as a multiple of the measurement interval.
File size:
File name:
For a measurement interval of 50 ms, 500 ms, or 5 s, set a multiple of 1, 2, 4, or 10. Otherwise, set a multiple of 1, 2, 5, or 10.
Within approximately 10 MB per file
Automatically generated using the date, time, and serial number
MDDIXXXX.MXD
M: Month file created (local time), 1-9, X (October),
Y (November), Z (December)
DD: Date when file created (local time), 1-31
I: Files in measurement groups 1 to 3 are 1 to 3
Computed data file is M
Thinned values, T
XXXX: Sequence number 0000-9999
MXD: MW100 file extension (uppercase)
5-6
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
Data length:
Trigger Type
Direct
Trigger
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Measurement groups for which TRIGGER was selected can be set individually.
For the measurement groups on which Direct mode was selected, all groups have the same length.
Target
All groups
Selectable data length
30 min.
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, or 12 hours
1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 14, or 31 days
10, 20, or 30 min.
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, or 12 hours
1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 14, or 31 days
Individual groups
File size calculation: File size (bytes) = header size* + data size **
* Header size (bytes) = 904 + no. of recording channels × 232
** Measurement data size (bytes) = no. of recording measurement channels × 4 × no. of samples
Math data size (bytes) = no. of recording math channels × 6 × no. of samples
No. of samples = Save interval (s)/measurement interval (s)
Ex.) Measurement interval: 100 ms; no. of measurement channels, 24; save interval, 10 min.:
Header size = 904 (bytes) + 24 × 232 (bytes) = 6472 (bytes)
Data size = 24 (bytes) × (600 (s)/0.1 (s)) = 576,000 (bytes)
Guideline of the sample time for the different CF card sizes (when one type of measurement interval is used):
Number of
Saved CHs
10 CHs
24 CHs
60 CHs
10 ms
100 ms
500 ms
1 s
2 s
100 ms
500 ms
1 s
2 s
100 ms
500 ms
1 s
2 s
5 s
Measurement
Interval
Capacity of the CF card
128MB 512MB
8.8 hours
3.7 days
18.5 days
37 days
74 days
35.3 hours
14.8 days
74 days
148 days
296 days
1GB
2.8 days
28.9 days
144 days
289 days
578 days
36.8 hours
7.7 days
15.3 days
30 days
6.1 days
30 days
61 days
122 days
12.0 days
60 days
119 days
239 days
14.8 hours
3.0 days
6.1 days
12.3 days
31 days
2.4 days
12.3 days
24.6 days
49 days
123 days
4.8 days
24.1 days
48 days
96 days
241 days
Write message: During execution of the recording action, a message that corresponds to the recorded data can be included in the file.
No. of characters in message: Up to 15
Messages: 5
No. of write operations: Up to 10 per file
Operation upon failure recovery:
If a power failure occurs during recording, the data up to the failure is restored upon recovery from the failure. The data after recovery is recorded continuously to newly created files.
Operation when synchronizing time:
If time synchronization to SNTP is carried out during recording, the time is saved to the data acquisition log file.
5
5-7
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Thinning Recording Function
Apart from the measured and computed values file, a set of thinned values from the measured and computed values are saved to CF card.
Record start/stop: Executed simultaneously upon recording of the measured values and computed values. No trigger functions are available.
Recording operation: User can select Thinning record or Do not record
Record mode:
Thinning time:
Select a record stop action of Single, Full stop, or Rotate.
Data saving is set for 1 per thinning time.
File name:
Data length:
Set a thinning time of: 4, 5, 10, 20, or 30 sec; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 20, or 30 min.; or 1 hour. However, the thinning time cannot be set shorter than the measurement interval.
Generated automatically in sequence using the date and time
(cannot be specified by the user).
Select 30 minutes, or 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, or 12 hours, or 1, 2, 3, 5, 7,
10, 14, or 31 days. However, it cannot be set so that the file size could exceed 10 MB. Also, the data length cannot be set shorter than the thinning time.
Recording channels: Can be specified for each channel (settings for recording of
File size:
Writing message: measured and computed values is set separately)
The file size equation is the same as that for the computed value files.
During execution of the recording action, a message that corresponds to the recorded data can be included in the file. Five messages of up to 15 characters each are available for including in a single file, up to 10 messages per file.
Operation upon failure recovery:
If a power failure occurs during recording, the data up to the failure is restored after appended during recovery from the failure. The data after recovery is recorded continuously to newly created files.
Internal Backup Memory
Function overview: Using the main unit’s internal backup memory (SRAM) even upon a power failure, data before the failure is saved to CF card without loss.
Backup memory capacity: For measured and computed values
For thinned values
1.25 MB
256 KB
Saving Settings
Saves settings to CF card.
Saving/loading: Set by user function key on the main unit or by communication input. From the function keys, only the SETTING.PNL file can be
Created file name: loaded.
Saved settings: All settings are saved
File creation location: CONFIG folder on the CF card
From the user function keys, SETTING.PNL.
From communication commands or the browser, a name can be set with the PNL extension.
5-8
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Display
Status LED Illuminated:Indicates measuring, recording, alarm occurrence, computing, and receiving data by serial communications
Blinking: Recording or computation in progress
Two-digit 7-segment LED:
Ethernet port LED:
MW100 Data Acquisition Unit status display
Unit number, error occurrence time, power ON self-check in progress, key lock ON, processing.
Ethernet communication status (LINK, ACT)
Communication
Ethernet Port
Interface:
Connector type:
Main protocols:
Ethernet (10BASE-T)
RJ-45
FTP, SMTP, SNTP, DHCP, DNS, HTTP, Modbus/TCP, and
MW100 dedicated protocol.
Communication services: Send/receive measured and computed values, send/receive setting values, maintenance/diagnostic services, and others.
Login function: Use when accessing a setting/measurement server,
List of services: maintenance/diagnostic server, FTP server, or Web server. Up to
10 can be registered.
Modbus server Uses Modbus protocol
FTP server
HTTP server
SNTP server
File transfer services
Web services
Time synchronization
Timeout function:
Keep alive function: If no response is made to periodically sent test packets on the
TCP level, the connection is forcibly closed.
DHCP function: The IP address is automatically obtained from the DHCP server
SNTP function:
GENE server
DIAG server
For communication commands only for MW100
For maintenance diagnostics
Connection to server from which no communication is made over a specified period is forcibly dropped.
As the client, this function can acquire time information from the apecified SNTP server when the power is turned on, upon start of measurement, when the SNTP client is turned ON, at a userspecified time, and at a specified time interval.
When time information is acquired upon startup, measurement start, and when the SNTP client is turned ON, the time is not applied if the difference between the time of the MW100 and the server is 1 hour or more. When the time is acquired at specified time intervals, the MW100 time is corrected by 1 second at 10 second intervals. This is effective when the shortest
E-Mail function: measurement interval within a unit is two seconds or more.
However, if the time between the server and MW100 is different by 10 minutes or more, the time is not applied.
Sends e-mail according to alarm activation/release, specified time intervals, file creation time, time at which free memory space drops below specified amount, time power turned ON, times errors occur, and other times.
Two mail recipient locations can be set (multiple addresses using up to 150 characters).
5
IM MW100-01E
5-9
5.2 Main Module Specifications
FTP function:
HTTP function:
Acting as a client, measured values, computed values, thinned value files, data acquisition logs, and alarm summaries in the CF card can be transferred. Up to two recipients, a primary and secondary recipient, can be specified (using up to 64 characters).
The file is sent upon creation of the file. The files are sent to the primary recipient first, and if transmission fails, they are sent to the secondary recipient. If transmission to the secondary recipient also fails, the file is held in memory (up to eighteen files that failed to be sent are held) and transmission is retried after the next file is created or when the power is turned on (assuming there are files in the CF card). If transmission fails more than eighteen times, old files are overwritten with new ones.
When acting as the server, the MW can transfer or delete files according to commands from a PC.
Enables entry of settings on the MW100, starting and stopping of measurement, computation, and recording, and real time monitoring of measured and computed values using a Web browser, as well as acquisition of CF card files using WebDAV.
RS-232 Interface (/C2 Option)
Connection method: Point-to-point
Communications:
Synchronization:
Baud rate:
Start bit:
Half-duplex
Start-stop synchronization
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bits
1 bit, fixed
Data length:
Parity:
Stop bit:
Select either 7 or 8 bits
Select Odd, Even, or None
Select either 1 or 2 bits
Hardware handshaking: RS-CS can be used
Software handshaking: X-ON, X-OFF can be used
Receive buffer length: 2047Byte
Protocol: Dedicated protocol and Modbus/RTU
Communication services: Send/receive setting values, send/receive measured and computed values.
RS-422A/485 Interface (/C3 Option)
Connection method: Multi-drop: 4-wire 1: 32, 2-wire 1: 31
Communications:
Synchronization:
Half-duplex
Start-stop synchronization
Baud rate:
Start bit:
Data length:
Parity:
Select 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps
1 bit, fixed
Select either 7 or 8 bits
Select Odd, Even, or None
Stop bit: Select either 1 or 2 bits
Receive buffer length: 2047Byte
Protocol: Dedicated protocol and Modbus/RTU
Communication services: Send/receive setting values, send/receive measured and computed values.
5-10
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Communication Input Function
All settings on the main unit other than dip switch operation can be performed with communication commands. For information about communication commands, see the
MW100 Communication Command manual (IM MW100-17E).
Communication Output Function
The following information about the main unit can be output using communication commands. For information about communication commands, see the MW100
Communication Command manual (IM MW100-17E).
Item
Measured value
Computed value
Output value
Units, decimal place
Description
Outputs most recent measured value
Outputs most recent computed value
Outputs most recent output value
Outputs the units and decimal place for measured and computed values
Outputs the measured and computed values from the FIFO buffer
Outputs the thinned values from the FIFO buffer
Measured and computed value
FIFO data
Thinned values FIFO data
Alarm summary
Message summary
Data acquisition log
Computation status
Recording status
Operation log
Communication log
FTP log
SMTP client log
DHCP log
HTTP log
Modbus client log
Outputs the alarm summary
Outputs the message summary
Outputs the data acquisition log
Outputs the MATH status
Outputs the recording status
Outputs the key operation log
Outputs the communication log
Outputs the FTP operation log
Outputs the mail transmission log
Outputs the DHCP log
Outputs the HTTP log
Outputs the Modbus client log
Modbus client command Outputs the Modbus client status
Modbus client connection status Outputs the Modbus client connection status
Modbus master log Outputs the Modbus master log
Modbus master command Outputs the Modbus client status
Modbus master connection status Outputs the Modbus master connection status
Status
User information
Relay information
Status byte information
User settings
Relay action information
System information
Analog output information
Initial balancing information
Outputs the module recognition status
Outputs the analog output value information
Outputs initial balance information for the strain input module
Common to Modbus Master Function and Modbus Slave Function
Communication possible with Modbus/RTU protocol
Communication media:RS-232, RS-422A/485
Control method: No flow control (None only)
Baud rate:
Start bit:
Data length:
Parity:
Select 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps
1 bit, fixed
8 bit, fixed
Select Odd, Even, or None
Stop bit: Select either 1 or 2 bits
Transmission mode: RTU (remote terminal unit) mode only
Slave address: 1 to 247
5-11
5
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Modbus Master Function (/M1 option)
Communication interval:The interval for data loading from other instruments is selected from the following.
100, 200, 250, 500 ms, or 1, 2, 5, or 10 s
Timeout time: From the following, select a timeout time for no response from the specified slave after sending commands from the main unit.
100, 200, 250, 500 ms, or 1 s
Number of retries: The number of transmissions attempted if no response to commands from the main unit are received from the slaves.
Select from the following: OFF, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5
Communication recovery time:You can select from the following the send interval for the command sent after the point at which there is no response from the slaves after sending commands the specified number of retry times.
Soon (communication interval), 1 to 120 s
Wait between commands: Select a time to wait between receiving of the response to a command until the next command is sent.
0, 10, 20, 50, 100 ms
Supported function: The functions that the MW100 supports are as follows.
Function Code
3
4
6
16
Function
Read hold registers
(4XXXX, 4XXXXX)
Read input registers
(3XXXX, 3XXXXX)
Simple write to hold registers (4XXXX,
4XXXXX)
Operation
MW100 loads data from the hold registers of another instrument to its communication input channel data.
MW100 writes data from the input register of another instrument to its communication input channel data.
MW100 writes to the hold register of another instrument.
Write to hold registers MW100 writes to the hold register of
(4XXXX ,4XXXXX) another instrument
Command settings: Up to 100 commands can be set.
Command items: Loading channels: C001 toC300
Writing channels: 001 to 060, A001 to A300, C001 to C300
Address: 1 to 247
Input registers:
Hold registers:
Type:
30001 to 39999, 300001 to 365535
40001 to 49999, 400001 to 465535
Type
INT16
UINT16
INT32_B
INT32_L
UINT32_B
UINT32_L
FLOAT_B
FLOAT_L
Description
Signed 16-bit integer
Unsigned 16-bit integer
Signed 32-bit integer (from upper to lower. )
Signed 32-bit integer (from lower to upper. )
Unsigned 32-bit integer (from upper to lower. )
Unsigned 32-bit integer (from lower to upper)
32-bit floating decimal (from upper to lower. )
32-bit floating decimal (from lower to upper)
5-12
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Modbus Slave Function
Supported function: The functions that the MW100 supports are as follows.
Function Code
3
4
6
8
16
Function
Read hold registers
(4XXXX)
Operation
MW100 read communication input data
16 written by function code 6 or 16
Read Input registers MW100 reads the main instrument’s
(3XXXX) measured, computed, and time data.
Simple write to hold MW100 writes to the main instrumentls registers (4XXXX) communication input data.
Loop back test MW100 performs the loop back test on the main instrument. Main instrument only support message return (diagnostic code (0x00).
Write to hold registers MW100 writes to the main instrument’s
(4XXXX) communication input data.
Register Assign (Modbus Server Functions and Sharing)
Input Registers Data
30001
30002
|
30119
Lower byte of measured data of measurement channel 001
Upper byte of measured data of measurement channel 001
|
Lower byte of measured data from measurement channel 060
30120 Upper byte of measured data from measurement channel 060
• No decimal place information.
Data Type
Int 32
31001
31002
|
31119
Lower byte of measured data from measurement channel 001
Upper byte of measured data from measurement channel 001
|
Lower byte of measured data from measurement channel 060
31120 Upper byte of measured data from measurement channel 060
• Includes decimal place information.
Float
32001
|
Alarm status of measured data of measurement channel 001 Bit string
|
32060 Alarm status of measured data of measurement channel 060
• Register structure and alarm status values
Alarm 2 1 4 3
4 bits 4 bits 4 bits 4 bits
0: No alarms
2: Lower limit alarm occurs
4: Differential lower limit alarm occurs
6: Rate of change lower limit alarm occurs
1: Upper limit alarm occurs
3: Differential upper limit alarm occurs
5: Rate of change upper limit alarm occurs
33001
33002
|
33599
Lower byte of computed data of computation channel A001
Upper byte of computed data of computation channel A001
|
Lower byte of computed data of computation channel A300
33600 Upper byte of computed data of computation channel A300
• No decimal place information.
34001
34002
|
34599
Lower byte of computed data of computation channel A001
Upper byte of computed data of computation channel A001
|
Lower byte of computed data of computation channel A300
34600 Upper byte of computed data of computation channel A300
• Includes decimal place information.
Int 32
Float
35001
|
Alarm status of computed data of computation channel A001 Bit string
|
35300 Alarm status of computed data of computation channel A300
• Register structure and alarm status value: Same as alarm status of measured data.
5
5-13
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Input Registers
39001
39002
39003
39004
39005
39006
39007
39008
Data
Year
Month
Day
Hours
Minute
Second
Milliseconds
DST(0, 1)
Data Type
Int 16
Hold Registers
40001
40002
|
40599
40600
Data
Lower byte of communication input channel C001
Upper byte of communication input channel C001
|
Lower byte of communication input channel C300
Upper byte of communication input channel C300
Data Type
Float
Modbus error response: The main unit returns the following error codes to the master instrument.
3
7
Code
1
2
Function
Function code invalid
Invalid register number
Operation
Requested non-supported function
Attempted to read/write registers for which no corresponding channels could be found.
Invalid number of registers The specified number of registers was zero.
Could not be executed Attempted to read MATH registers from an instrument without the MATH function option.
However, there is no response in the following cases.
• CRC Error
• Errors other than in above table.
5-14
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Modbus Client Function (/M1 option)
Communication possible with Modbus/TCP protocol
Communication media:
Communication interval:
Ethernet 10Base-T
You can select the following:
100, 200, 250, or 500 ms, or 1, 2, 5, or 10 s
Depending on the performance of the main unit, data reading and writing may not be able to be performed at the set communication interval resulting in data loss. If this
Connection wait time: occurs, the communication input channel holds the previous value. In this case, you must lengthen the communication interval, or reduce the load on the main unit.
The connection can be dropped if there is no response from the server after sending commands.
You can select the connection wait time from the following.
Forever (do not drop connection), 0 to 10 s
Communication recovery wait:The time after which commands are sent following disconnection after the connection wait time. Selected from the following: Soon (communication interval), 1-60 s
Connection destination (server): Up to 10 can be set.
Supported function: Same as Modbus master function
Command settings:
Command items:
Up to 100 commands can be set.
Loading channels: C001 to C300
Writing channels: 001 to 060, A001 to A300, C001 to C300
Server (specified by registered number): 1 to 10
Input registers: Same as Modbus master function
Hold registers: Same as Modbus master function
Type: Same as Modbus master function
Modbus Server Function
Communication possible with Modbus/TCP protocol
Communication media:
Port:
Ethernet 10Base-T
502/tcp
Communication interval: 100, 200, 250, or 500 ms, or 1, 2, 5, or 10 s
Maximum no. of simultaneous connections: 4
Receive timeout: Drops communication connection if packets not received for
30 s (fixed) or more
Supported function:
Register assignments:
Modbus error response:
Same as Modbus slave function. However, there is no function code 8.
Same as Modbus slave function
Same as Modbus slave function
5
5-15
5.2 Main Module Specifications
E-Mail Format
5-16
In the explanations that follow,
CRLF
means “carriage return/line feed.” Alarm
Notification E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [Alarm Summary]
• Syntax
CRLF
Alarm_Summary
CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/dd CRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ss
CRLF
CRLF
<Alarm Summary>
CRLF cc____lq_aaa
CRLF
••••••••••••••••••••••••••• mmmm_lq_aaa
CRLF
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••
CRLF s_cc_uuuuuufdddddEfp CRLF
••••••••••••••••••••••••••• s_mmmm_feeeeeeeeEfp
CRLF
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••
CRLF yy mo dd hh mi ss cc mmmm
Year (
00 to 99
)
Month (
01 to
12
)
Day (
01 to 31
)
Hour (
00 to 23
)
Minute (
00 to 59
)
Seconds (
00 to 59
)
Measurement ch no. (
01 to 60
, SKIP channels not output)
MATH ch no. (
A001 to A300
)
Alarm level (
1 to 4
)
Alarm type (
H
,
L
, h
, l
,
R
, r
) l q
H
(upper limit alarm),
L
(lower limit alarm), h
(differential upper limit alarm), l
(differential lower limit alarm),
R
(high limit on rate of aaa s change alarm), r
(low limit on rate of change alarm)
Alarm status ( off
, on
)
Data status (
N
,
D
,
O
,
E
)
N
(normal),
D
(differential input),
O
(over),
E
(error) uuuuuu
Unit information (output using 6 chars., left justified) mV____
: mV
V_____
: V f ddddd
^C____
: ° C
XXXXXX
: (user specified char. string)
Data symbols (+, –)
Data mantissa (measurement channel,
00000 to 99999
)
–32767 to +65535
: Normally allowed output range
+99999
: +OVER, ERROR (measurement error occurs), or indefinite
–99999
: –OVER eeeeeeee
Data mantissa (measurement channel,
00000000 to 99999999
)
–99999999 to +99999999
: Normally allowed output range
+99999999
: +OVER
–99999999
: –OVER p
_
Exponent (
0 to 4
)
Blank
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
File Creation Notification E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [File End]
• Syntax
CRLF
File_End
CRLF
<Time>
CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/dd
CRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ss CRLF
CRLF
<File_Name>
CRLF fl/fn
CRLF
CRLF yy mo dd hh mi ss fl fn
_ yy mo dd hh mi ss aaaaaaa bbbbbbb
_
Year (
00 to 99
)
Month (
01 to 12
)
Day (
01 to 31
)
Hour (
00 to 23
)
Minute (
00 to 59
)
Seconds (
00 to
59
)
Folder name
File name
Blank
Media Remaining Space Notification E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [Media Remain]
• Syntax
CRLF
Media_Remain
CRLF
<Time>
CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/dd
CRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ss CRLF
CRLF
<Media_Info> aaaaaaa_K_byte_total
CRLF bbbbbbb_K_byte_free
CRLF
CRLF
Year (
00 to 99
)
Month (
01 to 12
)
Day (
01 to 31
)
Hour (
00 to 23
)
Minute (
00 to
59
)
Seconds (
00 to 59
)
Media capacity [KB] (
0000000 to 9999999
)
Media total capacity [KB] (
0000000 to 9999999
)
Blank
5
5-17
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Power ON Notification E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [Power Failure]
• Syntax
CRLF
Power_Failure
CRLF
<Power_Off>
CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/dd
CRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ss CRLF
CRLF
<Power_On>
CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/dd
CRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ss
CRLF
CRLF yy mo dd hh mi ss
_ yy mo dd hh mi ss nnn mm••mm
_
Year (
00 to 99
)
Month (
01 to 12
)
Day (
01 to 31
)
Hour (
00 to 23
)
Minute (
00 to
59
)
Seconds (
00 to 59
)
Blank
Error Notification E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [ERROR]
• Syntax
CRLF
ERROR
CRLF
<Time>
CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/dd
CRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ss
CRLF
CRLF
<ERROR_Message>
CRLF nnn_mmmmmmm
CRLF
CRLF
Year (
00 to
99
)
Month (
01 to 12
)
Day (
01 to 31
)
Hour (
00 to 23
)
Minute (
00 to 59
)
Seconds (
00 to 59
)
Error number
Error message
Blank
5-18
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Periodic Report Notification E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [Periodic Data]
• Syntax
CRLF
Periodic_Data
CRLF
<Time> CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/dd
CRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ss
CRLF
CRLF
<CH_Data> CRLF s_cc_uuuuuufdddddEfp
CRLF
••••••••••••••••••••••••••• s_mmmm_feeeeeeeEfp CRLF
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••
CRLF yy mo dd hh mi ss s
Year (
00 to 99
)
Month (
01 to 12
)
Day (
01 to 31
)
Hour (
00 to 23
)
Minute (
00 to 59
)
Seconds (
00 to 59
)
Data status (
N
,
D
,
O
,
E
)
N
(normal),
D
(differential input),
O
(over),
E
(error)
Measurement ch no. (
01 to 60
, SKIP channels not output) cc mmmm uuuuuu
MATH ch no. (
A001 to A300
, SKIP channels not output)
Unit information (output using 6 chars.) mV____
: mV
V_____
: V
^C____
:
°
C xxxxxx
: (user specified char. string)
Symbols (+, –) f ddddd
Data mantissa (measurement channel,
00000 to 99999
) eeeeeeee
Data mantissa (measurement channel,
00000000 to
99999999
) p
_
Data exponent (
0 to 4
)
Blank
Test E-mail Format
• Subject
Subject: [Test]
• Syntax
CRLF
Test CRLF
<Time>
CRLF
DATE_yy/mo/dd
CRLF
TIME_hh:mi:ss CRLF
CRLF yy mo dd hh mi ss
_
Year (
00 to 99
)
Month (
01 to 12
)
Day (
01 to 31
)
Hour (
00 to 23
)
Minute (
00 to 59
)
Seconds (
00 to 59
)
Blank
5-19
5
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Communication Test: This function checks whether the FTP and mail transmission settings are entered correctly.
Notation
FTP1
FTP2
SMTP1
SMTP2
Description
Transfers a test file to recipient 1.
Transfers a test file to recipient 2.
Transfers a test mail to recipient 1.
Transfers a test mail to recipient 2.
User Interface
Number of keys:
Key action:
4: Start key (START) and Stop key (STOP),
User function key 1 (USER1),
User function key 2 (USER2),
START: Measurement, computation, and recording start
STOP: Measurement, computation, and recording stop, and saving of data acquisition logs and alarm summaries
USER1: Write setting values file (default)
USER2: Load setting file (default)
User function keys: Keys can be assigned arbitrarily by the user with the Event/Action function.
Key lock function:
Dip switch 1:
All keys can be enabled or disabled at once.
Operation upon power ON determined by dip switch settings.
All switches ON: Normal operation
Switch 5 (only) OFF: All settings initialized
Switch 8 (only) OFF: Fixed IP address (192.168.0.10)
Other Functions
Time
Time function: Time settings consist of date, time, and time zone.
Backup function included.
Year designation: Last two digits of Western calendar
80 to 99 (1980-1999), 00 to 35(2000-2035)
Internal time accuracy: ± 100ppm
Daylight saving time: The time on the internal clock is updated on the specified month, week, weekday, and time.
Summer: On the month, week, weekday, and hour set as
Summer time, the time on the internal clock is moved
Winter: one hour ahead.
On the month, week, weekday, and hour set as
Winter time, the time on the internal clock is moved one hour behind.
Unlike the internal clock, which is changed on the main unit, the dates of the measured and computed values are not adjusted.
Tag Strings
During recording:
During displaying:
Tags can be added to measured values that are recorded and saved.
You can select whether to display tags or channel numbers on all channels.
Tag string settings: Can be set channel by channel.
No. of characters: Up to 15
5-20
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Log Information
• Data acquisition logs
When recording is stopped, data acquisition logs saved on the main unit are all saved to the CF card.
Maximum no. of saved logs:
File name:
Save location:
1021 (if this number exceeded, old files are overwritten by new ones)
RECORDLG.TXT
During recording, in the DATAnnnn folder on the CF card
When recording stopped, on the root folder of the CF card
• Alarm summaries
When recording is stopped, alarm summaries saved on the main unit are all saved to the CF card.
Maximum no. of saved summaries:
256 (if this number exceeded, old files are overwritten by new
File name: ones)
ALARMLG.TXT
Save location: During recording, in the DATAnnnn folder on the CF card
• Communication related log information can be saved in the main unit.
Communication log, FTP client operation log, e-mail operation log, DHCP operation log. These can only be referenced through communication output, and when the power is cut, they are initialized and not saved.
Maximum no. saved: Shown in the table below. If the number is exceeded, old logs are overwritten
Item
Operation log
Error log
Message summary
Communication log
FTP client log
SNTP client log
SNTP client log
DHCP client log
FTP server log
HTTP server log
Modbus master log
Modbus client log
Computation status
Recording status
1
1
50
50
50
50
50
50
Maximum no. saved
256
50
50
200
50
50
Maximum no. displayed
Item
Modbus client connection command
Modbus client connection status
Modbus master command
Modbus master connection status
Strain initial balance result
Maximum no. displayed
100
10
100
247
60
Event/Action Function
By linking the Event function and Action function, you can control the operations of the main unit.
Number of settings: 30
5-21
5
5.2 Main Module Specifications
5-22
Event operation:
Event function:
Action function:
Edge: Execute an operation once according to changes in events
Level: Continue operation as long as the condition continues.
MATH operation start, recording operation start, flag input enabled
The same start function cannot be set to edge start or multiple settings simultaneously. When setting the start operation to time up on the timer, match time, or user function key, then computation start/stop, recording start/stop, and flag input 0/1 repeat alternately.
Digital input information, alarm occurrence, relay output, internal timer time up, match time, user function key, recording start, and others.
Recording start/stop, activate trigger, computation start/stop/ reset/clear, reset timer, alarm ACK, flag input, write message, read/write settings.
Read/write setting value file can be performed with user function key.
Execution sequence: Execute from Event/Action setting number 1.
The action that is performed is of the last event that is executed.
Internal Timer
No. of timers:
Types of timers:
6
Two; Relative timer and Absolute timer
Relative time timer: Repeats time up every specified time interval.
Time interval can be set in 1-minute intervals.
Setting range is 00 days 00 hours 00 min. to 31 days 23 hours 59 minutes. If the setting of the relative timer is changed or in the event of a power failure, the timer is reset to 0 and starts again. If the clock is changed, the timer time is not adjusted.
Absolute time timer: Using the specified reference time as a standard, repeats the time up every specified time interval.
Reference time set in one-minute intervals in the range of 00 hours 00 min. to 23 hours 59 minutes.
Time intervals: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30 min, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6,
8, 12, 24 h. When the power fails or the clock is changed and the timeup time is exceeded, the time up is not acknowledged.
Match Time
No. of match times: 3
Match time function: Time up occurs: every month on the specified day, every week on the specified time; or every day at the specified time.
The setting is set in 1-minute intervals. When the power fails or the clock is changed and the timeup time is exceeded, the time up is not acknowledged.
Initializing Settings
Two types of settings initialization are available.
Initialization of all settings:
Initializes all setting values and measured values on the main unit.
You can perform initialization through communication commands or by resetting the dip switch positions and turning ON the unit.
When initialized using communication commands, module recognition information is not initialized.
Initialization of all settings excluding communication parameters:
All settings and measured values except for communication parameters and module recognition information are initialized.
Executed using communication commands.
IM MW100-01E
5.2 Main Module Specifications
Initialization of the CF Card
Formats the CF card.
Format type:
CF card size:
Supports FAT16, logical format only
2 GB maximum
General Specifications
Operating temperature: –20 to 60 ° C
Operating humidity: 20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 ° C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50
°
C
5 to 30% RH for 50 to 60 ° C
Power consumption: Approx. 8 W
Insulation resistance: Between power supply terminal and earth terminal: 20 M Ω or more (500 VDC)
Withstand Voltage AC power Between AC power supply terminal and earth terminal:
1500 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute
DC power Between DC power supply terminal and earth terminal: 1000 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute
External dimensions: Approx. 105 (W) × 131 (H) × 137 (D) mm
Weight: Approx. 1kg.
External Dimensions
Units: mm
105
137
5
MEASURE
RECORD
SERIAL RD
ALARM
MATH
ETHERNET
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
SW ON
START
10BASE - T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
POWER
STOP
USER 1 USER 2
100-240V AC
TERMN
ON OFF
FG SG SDB SDA RDB RDA
SERIAL COMM 70VA MAX 50/60Hz
IM MW100-01E
MEASURE
RECORD
SERIAL RD
ALARM
MATH
ETHERNET
DATA ACQUISITION UNIT
SW
ON
START
10BASE - T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
POWER
STOP
USER 1 USER 2
12-28V DC - - -
SERIAL COMM
+ -
35VA MAX
144.4
If not specified, the tolerance is
±
3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the tolerance is ± 0.3 mm.
5-23
5-24
5.3
Base Plate Specifications
Number of main modules that can be attached:
1 (always attached)
Number of input/output modules that can be attached:
1 to 6 (specified by the suffix code)
External dimensions: Approx. 118 to 408 (W) × 75 (H) × 35 (D) mm
Weight: Approx. 0.37 kg (1 main module, for connecting six input/output modules)
External Dimensions
Units: mm
MX150-1, -2, -3, -4, -5, -6
407.5 (1 main module, for connecting six input/output modules)
58 pitches in between
117.5 (1 main module, for connecting one input/output module) 22.5
34.6
If not specified, the tolerance is ± 3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the tolerance is ± 0.3 mm.
Attaching the MW100 Main Module
The accessory bracket must be attached in order to attach the MW100 main module to the base plate. For information about attaching the bracket, see the Installation and
Connection Guide (IM MW100-72E).
IM MW100-01E
5.4
4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module
Specifications
Style number: S1
Type of measurement: DC voltage, thermocouple, 3-wire RTD, DI (contact, LEVEL)
Number of inputs: 4
Input method:
A/D resolution:
Floating unbalanced input, insulation between channels
16 bits (
±
20000/
±
6000)
Measuring range and accuracy:
The accuracy applies to standard operating conditions:
Ambient temp: 23
±
2
°
C, ambient humidity: 55
±
10% RH, supply voltage: 90 to 250 VAC, power frequency: 50/60 Hz
±
1%, warmup time: at least 30 minutes, without adverse conditions such as vibrations.
Input
DC voltage
B
K
Measurement
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2 V
6 V
20 V
100 V
60mV (high res.)
1V
6V (high res.)
R 1
S
1
1
1
Range
Type
E
1
J
1
T
1
L
2
U
N
3
W
4
KPvsAu7Fe
PR40-20
NiNiMo
WRe3-25
W/WRe26
Type-N(AWG14)
TXK GOST
Rated
Measurement
Range
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
–100.00 to 100.00 V
0.000 to 60.000 mV
–1.0000 to 1.0000 V
0.0000 to 6.0000 V
0.0 to 1760.0
°
C
0.0 to 1820.0
–200.0 to 1370.0
–200.0 to 800.0
°
C
–200.0 to 1100.0
°
C
–200.0 to 400.0
°
C
–200.0 to 900.0
°
C
–200.0 to 400.0
°
C
0.0 to 1300.0
°
C
0.0 to 2315.0
°
C
0.0 to 300.0K
0.0 to 1900.0
0.0 to 1310.0
0.0 to 2400.0
0.0 to 2400.0
0.0 to 1300.0
°
°
°
°
°
°
C
C
C
C
C
C
–200.0 to 600.0
°
°
C
C
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms or More
±
(0.05% of rdg + 5 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 5 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 20 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 20 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 1
°
C)
Except 0 to 100
°
C:
±
3.7
°
C, 100 to
300
°
C:
±
1.5
°
C for R and S;
400 to 600
°
C:
±
2
°
C, less than
400
°
C: not guaranteed for B
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7
°
C)
Except –200
°
C to –100
°
C:
±
(0.05% of rdg + 1
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.5
Except –200
±
°
C to –100
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7
°
°
C)
°
C:
C) for J and L
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 1
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7K)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2.5
°
C)
Except 300 to 700
°
C:
±
6
°
C, less than 300
°
C: not guaranteed
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2
°
C)
Except 0 to 200
°
C:
±
2.5
°
C, more than 2000
°
C:
±
(0.05% of rdg + 4
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2
°
C)
Except 100 to 300
°
C:
±
4
°
C, less than 100
°
C: not guaranteed
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.5
°
C)
Except –200 to 0
°
C:
±
(0.2% of rdg + 0.7
°
C)
1 R, S, B, K, E, J, T: ANSI, IEC 584, DIN IEC 584, JIS C 1602-1981
2 L: Fe-CuNi, DIN43710/U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710
3 N: Nicrosil-Nisil, IEC 584, DIN IEC 584
4 W: W•5%RE-W•26%Re (Hoskins Mfg Co)
±
±
±
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 1.67 ms
Except –200
±
(0.1% of rdg + 25digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 10digits)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 100 digits)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 10 digits)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 100 digits)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 4
°
C)
Except 0 to 100
°
C:
±
10
°
C, 100 to
300
°
C:
±
5
°
C for R and S;
400 to 600
°
C:
±
7
°
C, less than
400
°
C: not guaranteed for B
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5
°
(0.1% of rdg + 6
°
±
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5
°
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 7
°
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5K)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 12
°
C)
Except 300 to 700
°
C:
±
25
°
C, less than 300
°
C: not guaranteed
±
(0.1% of rdg + 2.7
°
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 7
°
C)
Except 0 to 200
°
C:
±
12
°
C, more than 2000
°
C:
±
(0.1% of rdg + 11
°
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 8.5
°
C)
Except 100 to 300
°
C:
±
12
°
C, less than 100
°
C: not guaranteed
±
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5
°
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 2.5
°
C)
Except –200 to 0
°
C:
±
(1% of rdg + 2.5
°
C)
°
C)
C)
C to –100
°
C:
±
(0.1% of rdg + 2.5
°
C)
Except –200
°
C to –100
°
C:
±
(0.1% of rdg + 5
°
C) for J and L
Highest
Resolution
(1 Digit)
1
µ
V
10
µ
V
10
µ
V
100
µ
V
1 mV
1 mV
10 mV
1
µ
V
100
µ
V
100
µ
V
0.1
°
C
0.1K
0.1
°
C
5
5-25
IM MW100-01E
5.4 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications
5-26
Input
RTD
(Measurement current: 1 mA)
RTD
(Measurement current: 2 mA)
Measurement
Range
Rated
Measurement
Cu10 GE
Type
Range
Pt100
Ni120
Pt100
Pt50
1
Cu10 GE
Cu10 L&N
4
Cu10 WEED
4
Cu10 BAILEY
J263B
1
JPt100
3
JPt100
1
JPt100
1
Pt100 (high res.)
JPt100 (high res.)
Ni100 SAMA
Ni100 DIN
2
2
Pt100 (high noise resistance)
(high noise resistance)
Pt100 GOST
1
Pt100 (high res.)
JPt100 (high res.)
4
Cu10 at 20
°
C
4 alpha=0.00392
Cu10 at 20
°
C alpha=0.00393
Cu25 at 0
°
C alpha=0.00425
Cu53 at 0
°
C
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
–200.0 to 550.0
°
C
–140.00 to 150.00
°
C
–140.00 to 150.00
°
C
–200.0 to 250.0
°
C
–60.0 to 180.0
°
C
–70.0 to 200.0
°
C
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
–200.0 to 550.0
°
C
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
–200.0 to 550.0
°
C
–140.00 to 150.00
°
C
–140.00 to 150.00
°
C
–200.0 to 550.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
0.0 to 300.0K
–200.0 to 300.0
–200.0 to 300.0
–200.0 to 300.0
–50.0 to 150.0
°
°
°
°
C
C
C
C alpha=
0.00426035
Cu100 at 0
°
C alpha=0.00425
–50.0 to 150.0
°
C
Pt25 (JPt100/4)
–200.0 to 550.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
(high resolution)
Cu10 L&N
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
(high resolution)
Cu10 WEED
(high resolution)
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms or More
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.7
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.7
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.5
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.5
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.7
°
°
°
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
C)
C)
C)
C)
C)
C)
C)
C)
C)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3K)
C)
C)
C)
C)
C)
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 1.67 ms
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
±(0.1% of rdg + 2.5
±(0.2% of rdg + 2.5
±(0.2% of rdg + 2
°
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
°
°
°
°
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
±(0.2% of rdg + 2.5
C)
C)
C)
C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5K)
±(0.2% of rdg + 2
°
°
C)
°
C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 2.5
°
°
°
°
°
C)
C)
C)
C)
°
C)
C)
C)
C)
Cu10 BAILEY
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
(high resolution)
Pt100 (high noise resistance)
JPt100 (high noise resistance)
Cu100 GOST
Cu50 GOST
Cu10 GOST
–200.0 to 250.0
–200.0 to 250.0
–200.0 to 200.0
–200.0 to 200.0
–200.0 to 200.0
°
°
°
°
°
C
C
C
C
C
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
°
C)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.7
°
°
°
C)
C)
C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
°
C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
°
C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
°
C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 0.5
°
C)
DI
Level
Contact input
Vth = 2.4 V
Threshold level accuracy: ±0.1 V
ON for 100
Ω
or less, OFF for 10 k
Ω
or more
5
1 Pt50: JIS C 1604-1981, JIS C 1606-1986/Pt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989, IEC 751, DIN IEC 751/
JPt100: JIS C 1604-1981, JIS C 1606-1989
2 SAMA/DIN
3 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY
4 Guaranteed accuracy range Cu10 GE: –84.4 to 170.0
°
C/Cu10 L&N: –75.0 to 150.0
°
C/Cu10 WEED: –20.0 to 250.0
°
C/
Cu10 BAILEY: –20.0 to 250.0
°
C
5 Measured using a measurement current of approximately 10
µ
A at 200 mV range. Threshold level is approximately 0.1 V.
Highest
Resolution
(1 digit)
0.1
0.1
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.01
0.1
°
C
0.1K
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
0.01
°
°
C
°
0.1
°
C
C
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
C
C
Measurement interval, integration time, and filter:
Measurement
Interval
10 ms
Integration
Time
Filter
Rejected Noise and Notes
50 ms
1.67 ms*
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto**
Rectangular
600 Hz and its integer multiples
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.67 or 20 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
1 s
2, 5,10, 20, 30, 60 s
36.67 ms
100 ms
200 ms
Trapezoidal
Rectangular
Cos
50 Hz or 60 Hz and their integer multiples
10 Hz and its integer multiples
Fc = 5-Hz low-pass filter
* When the measurement interval is 10 ms, measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency
noise is not rejected. In such cases, set the measurement interval to 50 ms or more.
** For DC power, set to 20 ms.
Reference junction compensation:
Switch external/internal by channel, includes remote RJC function
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
5.4 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications
Reference junction compensation accuracy:
When measuring temperature greater than or equal to 0 ° C and when the temperature of the input terminal is balanced
Maximum input voltage:
Normal mode voltage:
Type R, S, W: ± 1 ° C
Type K, J, E, T, N, L, U, TXK: ± 0.5
° C
Type N(AWG14), PLATINEL, NiNiMo, WRe3-25,
W/WRe26: ± 1 ° C
Note: The internal reference junction compensation is fixed to 0
°
C for type B and PR40-20
DC voltage at 1-V range or less, TC, RTC, and DI (contact):
± 10 VDC (continuous)
Other measurement ranges:
±
120 VDC (continuous)
DC voltage, TC, DI (LEVEL): 1.2 times the range rating or less (50/60 Hz, peak value including the signal component)
RTD 100 Ω : 50 mVpeak
RTD 10 Ω , 25 Ω , 50 Ω : 10 mVpeak
Normal mode rejection ratio: For integration time of 16.67 ms or more: 40 dB or more
(50/60 Hz ± 0.1%)
For integration time of 1.67 ms: 50/60 Hz is not rejected
The RTD and resistance ranges indicates the voltage
Common-mode voltage: conversion value when current flows.
600 VACrms (50/60 Hz), reinforced (double) insulation
Common mode rejection ratio (50/60 Hz ± 0.1%, 500 Ω unbalanced between minus measurement terminal and ground)
The RTD and resistance ranges indicates the voltage conversion value when current flows.
When the integration time is 16.67 ms or more: 120 dB or more
When the integration time is 1.67 ms or more: 80 dB or more
Common-mode voltage between channels:
Noise rejection:
250 VACrms (50/60 Hz), reinforced (double) insulation
Rejection by the integrating A/D converter and the use of
Input resistance:
Insulation resistance: low pass filters
For DC voltage 1 V range or less and thermocouple range:
10 M Ω or less
For DC voltage 2 V range or higher: Approx. 1 M Ω
While measurement stopped: Approx. 1 M Ω
Between input terminal and earth terminal: 20 M Ω or more
(500 VDC)
10 nA or less (except for burnout setting) Input bias current:
Withstand voltage: 2300 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between input terminals
3700 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between the input terminal and earth terminal
Input signal source resistance: DC voltage, thermocouple: 2 k Ω or less
RTD 50 Ω , 100 Ω types: 10 Ω per line or less
Thermocouple burnout:
RTD10 Ω , 25 Ω types: 1 Ω per line or less
Superposed electric current system, detection within the thermocouple range (detection ON/OFF possible)
Up/Down setting is possible, current approximately 100 nA
2 k
Ω
or less normal, 10 M
Ω
or more disconnected
Effect on measurement accuracy: ± 15 µ V or less (not including effect of signal source resistance)
Parallel capacity during RTD: 0.01
µ
F or less
Power consumption: Approx. 3 W
External dimensions:
Weight:
Terminal type:
Applicable wire size:
Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal cover)
Approx. 0.5 kg.
Clamp, detachable per channel
0.2 to 2.5 mm
2
(AWG24 to 12)
5-27
5
5.4 4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications
Effects of Operating Conditions
The specifications below apply when the integration time is 16.67 ms or more.
Warm-up time: At least 30 minutes after power-up
Effects of ambient temperature:
The effect received by changes in 10 ° C increments of the ambient temperature is
±
(0.05% of rdg. + 0.05% of range) or less
However, for Cu10
Ω
:
±
(0.2% of range + 1 digit)
Effects of power fluctuation:
Meets the accuracy specifications for AC power supply in the range 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V
Effects of magnetic field: The fluctuation in external magnetic fields for AC (50/60 Hz) 400
A/m is
± (0.1% of rdg. + 10 digits) or less
Effects from the signal source resistance:
Effect from fluctuation in DC voltage and thermocouple signal source resistance of 1 k Ω
DC voltage: 1 V range or less ± 10 µ V or less
2 V range or higher ± 0.15% of rdg. or less
Thermocouple: ± 10 µ V or less
RTD:
However, when burnout is set, ± 150 µ V or less
Fluctuation per 10 Ω change per line (3 lines all same resistance) for 100 Ω types: ± 0.1
° C or less; other than 100 Ω types: ± 1.0
° C or less; fluctuation resulting from difference in resistance between
Effect of position: lead wires of 40 m
Ω
(max. difference among three wires): approximately 0.1
°
C (for Pt100)
Horizontal with the feet at the bottom is the rule.
Effects of vibration: The fluctuation that results by applying a sinusoidal vibration along all three axes at a frequency between 10 to 60 Hz and an acceleration of 0.2 m/s
2
is ± (0.1% of rdg. + 1 digit) or less
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
–20 to 60 ° C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 ° C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50
°
C
5 to 30% RH for 50 to 60 ° C
External Dimensions
Units: mm
57 150.8
5-28
If not specified, the tolerance is ± 3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the tolerance is ± 0.3 mm.
IM MW100-01E
5.5
10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module
Specifications
Style number: S1
Type of measurement: DC voltage, thermocouple, 3-wire RTD, DI (contact, LEVEL)
Number of inputs:
Input method:
10
Floating unbalanced input, insulation between channels (b
A/D resolution: terminal common for RTD)
16 bits (
±
20000/
±
6000)
Measuring range and accuracy:
The accuracy applies to standard operating conditions:
Ambient temp: 23
±
2
°
C, ambient humidity: 55
±
10% RH, supply voltage: 90 to 250 VAC, power frequency: 50/60 Hz
±
1%, warmup time: at least 30 minutes, without adverse conditions such as vibrations.
Input
DC voltage
B
K
1
1
Measurement
2 V
6 V
20 V
100 V
Range
Type
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
60mV (high res.)
1V
6V (high res.)
R
1
S
1
E
1
J 1
T
1
L 2
U
N
3
W
4
KPvsAu7Fe
PR40-20
NiNiMo
WRe3-25
W/WRe26
Type-N(AWG14)
TXK GOST
Rated
Measurement
Range
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
–100.00 to 100.00 V
0.000 to 60.000 mV
–1.0000 to 1.0000 V
0.0000 to 6.0000 V
0.0 to 1760.0
°
C
0.0 to 1820.0
°
C
–200.0 to 1370.0
°
C
–200.0 to 800.0
°
C
–200.0 to 1100.0
°
C
–200.0 to 400.0
°
C
–200.0 to 900.0
°
C
–200.0 to 400.0
°
C
0.0 to 1300.0
°
C
0.0 to 2315.0
°
C
0.0 to 300.0K
0.0 to 1900.0
0.0 to1310.0
0.0 to 2400.0
0.0 to 2400.0
0.0 to 1300.0
°
°
°
°
°
C
C
C
C
C
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms or More
±
(0.05% of rdg + 5 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 5 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 20 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 20 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 1
°
C)
Except 0 to 100
°
C:
±
3.7
°
C, 100 to
300
°
C:
±
1.5
°
C for R and S;
400 to 600
°
C:
±
2
°
C, less than
400
°
C: not guaranteed for B
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7
°
C)
Except –200
°
C to –100
°
C:
±
(0.05% of rdg + 1
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.5
Except –200
±
°
C to –100
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7
°
°
C)
°
C:
C) for J and L
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 1
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7K)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2.5
°
C)
Except 300 to 700
°
C:
±
6
°
C, less than 300
°
C: not guaranteed
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7
Except 0 to 200
°
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2
°
C)
C:
±
2.5
°
C, more than 2000
°
C:
±
(0.05% of rdg + 4
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2
°
C)
Except 100 to 300
°
C:
±
4
°
C, less than 100
°
C: not guaranteed
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.7
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.5
°
C)
Except –200 to 0
°
C:
±
(0.2% of rdg + 0.7
°
C)
1 R, S, B, K, E, J, T: ANSI, IEC 584, DIN IEC 584, JIS C 1602-1981
2 L: Fe-CuNi, DIN43710/U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710
3 N: Nicrosil-Nisil, IEC 584, DIN IEC 584
4 W: W•5%RE-W•26%Re (Hoskins Mfg Co)
±
±
±
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms
Except –200
±
(0.1% of rdg + 25digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 10digits)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 100 digits)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 10 digits)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 100 digits)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 4
°
C)
Except 0 to 100
°
C:
±
10
°
C, 100 to
300
°
C:
±
5
°
C for R and S;
400 to 600
°
C:
±
7
°
C, less than
400
°
C: not guaranteed for B
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5
°
C to –100
(0.1% of rdg + 6
°
°
C)
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5
°
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 7
°
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5K)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 12
°
C)
Except 300 to 700
°
C:
±
25
°
C, less than 300
°
C: not guaranteed
±
(0.1% of rdg + 2.7
°
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 7
°
C)
Except 0 to 200
°
C:
±
12
°
C, more than 2000
°
C:
±
(0.1% of rdg + 11
°
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 8.5
°
C)
Except 100 to 300
°
C:
±
12
°
C, less than 100
°
C: not guaranteed
±
(0.1% of rdg + 3.5
C:
±
(1% of rdg + 2.5
°
C)
°
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 2.5
°
C)
Except –200 to 0
°
°
C:
±
(0.1% of rdg + 2.5
°
C)
Except –200
°
C to –100
°
C:
±
(0.1% of rdg + 5
°
C) for J and L
Highest
Resolution
(1 digit)
1
µ
V
10
µ
V
10
µ
V
100
µ
V
1 mV
1 mV
10 mV
1
µ
V
100
µ
V
100
µ
V
0.1
°
C
0.1K
0.1
°
C
5
5-29
IM MW100-01E
5.5 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications
5-30
Input
RTD
(Measurement current: 1 mA)
Measurement
Range
Type
Pt100
1
JPt100
1
Pt100 (high res.)
JPt100 (high res.)
Ni100 SAMA 2
Ni100 DIN
2
Ni120
3
Pt50
Cu10 GE
4
Cu10 L&N
4
Cu10 WEED
4
Cu10 BAILEY
4
J263B
Cu10 at 20
°
C alpha=0.00392
Cu10 at 20
°
C alpha=0.00393
Cu25 at 0
°
C alpha=0.00425
Cu53 at 0
°
C alpha=
0.00426035
Cu100 at 0
°
C alpha=0.00425
Pt25 (JPt100/4)
Cu10 GE
(high resolution)
Cu10 L&N
(high resolution)
Cu10 WEED
(high resolution)
Cu10 BAILEY
(high resolution)
Rated
Measurement
Range
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
–200.0 to 550.0
°
C
–140.00 to 150.00
°
C
–140.00 to 150.00
°
C
–200.0 to 250.0
°
C
–60.0 to 180.0
°
C
–70.0 to 200.0
°
C
–200.0 to 550.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
0.0 to 300.0K
–200.0 to 300.0
–200.0 to 300.0
–200.0 to 300.0
–50.0 to 150.0
–50.0 to 150.0
°
°
–200.0 to 550.0
–200.0 to 300.0
–200.0 to 300.0
–200.0 to 300.0
–200.0 to 300.0
°
°
°
C
C
°
°
°
°
°
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms or More
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.1% of rdg + 2
±(0.1% of rdg + 2
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.5
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.1% of rdg + 0.5
±(0.1% of rdg + 2
°
°
°
C)
C)
°
°
C)
°
°
°
°
C)
C)
C)
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3K)
C)
C)
C)
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 1.67 ms
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
±(0.2% of rdg + 5
°
C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5K)
±(0.2% of rdg + 5
±(0.2% of rdg + 2
°
°
C)
C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
±(0.2% of rdg + 2
±(0.2% of rdg + 5
°
°
°
°
°
C)
°
C)
C)
C)
C)
C)
DI
PT100GOST
Cu100GOST
Cu50GOST
Cu10GOST
Level
Contact input
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
–200.0 to 200.0
°
C
–200.0 to 200.0
°
C
–200.0 to 200.0
°
C
Vth = 2.4 V
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
±(0.1% of rdg + 2
°
C)
°
°
°
C)
C)
C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
°
C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
°
C)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
°
C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 5
°
C)
Threshold level accuracy: ±0.1 V
ON for 100
Ω
or less, OFF for 10 k
Ω
or more
5
1 Pt50: JIS C 1604-1981, JIS C 1606-1986/Pt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989, IEC 751, DIN IEC 751/
JPt100: JIS C 1604-1981, JIS C 1606-1989
2 SAMA/DIN
3 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY
4 Guaranteed accuracy range Cu10 GE: –84.4 to 170.0
°
C/Cu10 L&N: –75.0 to 150.0
°
C/Cu10 WEED: –20.0 to 250.0
°
C/
Cu10 BAILEY: –20.0 to 250.0
°
C
5 Measured using a measurement current of approximately 10
µ
A at 200 mV range. Threshold level is approximately 0.1 V.
Highest
Resolution
(1 Digit)
0.1
°
C
0.01
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1K
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
Measurement interval, integration time, and filter:
Measurement
Interval
Integration
Time
Burnout
Detection
Cycle
Filter Rejected Noise and Notes
100 ms
200 ms
1.67 ms
1 s 1
600 Hz and its integer multiples
2
500 ms
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto
3
Measurement interval
Rectangular
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency andset
16.67 or 20 ms
1 s
2 s
36.67 ms
100 ms
4
200 ms 5
Trapezoidal
Rectangular
50 Hz or 60 Hz and their integer multiples
10 Hz and its integer multiples
5 s
10, 20, 30, 60 s
200 ms
Cos Fc = 5-Hz low-pass filter
1
When the measurement interval is 100 ms, burnout is detected in one channel per measurement interval.
Therefore, if measurement is started in a burnout condition or after a burnout occurs, burnout cannot be detected for up to 10 measurements (approximately 1 second).
2 Because the power supply frequency noise is not rejected, measured values may fluctuate particularly for temperature measurements using thermocouples. If this happens, make the measurement interval longer, or use the 4-CH High-Speed Universal Input Module.
3
For DC power, set to 20 ms.
4 When synchronizing time by SNTP, the integral time is set to 36.67 ms. Also in this case, noise of 50 Hz, 60
Hz, and their integer multiples is rejected.
5 When synchronizing time by SNTP, the integral time is set to 100 ms. Also in this case, noise of 10 Hz and its integer multiples is rejected.
Reference junction compensation:
Switch external/internal by channel, includes remote RJC function
IM MW100-01E
IM MW100-01E
5.5 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications
Reference junction compensation accuracy:
When measuring temperature greater than or equal to 0 ° C and when the temperature of the input terminal is balanced
Type R, S, W:
±
1
°
C
Type K, J, E, T, N, L, U, TXK: ± 0.5
° C
Type N (AWG14), PLATINEL, NiNiMo, WRe3-25,
W/WRe26:
±
1
°
C
Note: Type B and PR40-20 internal RJC is fixed at 0
°
C
Maximum input voltage: DC voltage at 1-V range or less, TC, RTC, and DI (contact):
± 10 VDC (continuous)
Other measurement ranges:
±
120 VDC (continuous)
Normal-mode voltage: DC voltage, TC, DI (LEVEL): 1.2 times the range rating or less
(50/60 Hz, peak value including the signal component)
RTD 100
Ω
: 50 mVpeak
RTD 10 Ω , 25 Ω , 50 Ω : 10 mVpeak
Normal-mode rejection ratio:
For integration time of 16.67 ms or more: 40 dB or more (50/60
Hz ± 0.1%)
For integration time of 1.67 ms: 50/60 Hz is not rejected.
The RTD and resistance ranges indicate the voltage conversion value when current flows.
Common-mode voltage:600 VACrms (50/60 Hz), reinforced (double) insulation
Common mode rejection ratio (50/60 Hz ± 0.1%, 500 Ω unbalanced between minus measurement terminal and ground)
The RTD and resistance ranges indicate the voltage conversion value when current flows.
When the integration time is 16.67 ms or more: 120 dB or more
When the integration time is 1.67 ms: 80 dB or more
Common-mode voltage between channels: 120 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
Noise rejection: Rejection by the integrating A/D converter and the use of low
Input resistance:
Withstand Voltage pass filters
For DC voltage 1 V range or less and thermocouple range: 10
M Ω or less
For DC voltage 2 V range or higher: Approx. 1 M
Ω
Insulation resistance: Between input and ground: 20 M Ω or more (500 VDC)
Input bias current: 10 nA or less (except for burnout setting)
1000 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between input terminals
3700 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between the input terminal and earth terminal
Input signal source resistance:
DC voltage, thermocouple: 2 k
Ω
or less
RTD 50 Ω , 100 Ω types: 10 Ω per line or less
RTD 10 Ω , 25 Ω types: 1 Ω per line or less
Thermocouple burnout: Detection at a specified detection interval per measurement interval and detection within the thermocouple range (detection
ON/OFF possible)
Up/Down setting is possible
2 k Ω or less normal, 200 k Ω or more disconnected
(shunt capacitance: 0.01 µ F or less), detection current approx. 10
µ A, detection time approx. 2 ms
Parallel capacity during RTD: 0.01
µ
F or less
Power consumption: Approx. 1.2 W
External dimensions: Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal cover)
Weight: Approx. 0.5 kg.
Terminal type: Clamp, terminal board is detachable
Applicable wire size: 0.14 to 1.5 mm
2
(AWG26 to 16)
5-31
5
5.5 10-CH, Medium-Speed Universal Input Module Specifications
Effects of Operating Conditions
The specifications below apply when the integration time is 16.67 ms or more.
Warm-up time: At least 30 minutes after power-up
Effects of ambient temperature:
The effect received by changes in 10
°
C increments of the ambient temperature is
± (0.05% of rdg. + 0.05% of range) or less
However, for Cu10 Ω : ± (0.2% of range + 1 digit)
Effects of power fluctuation:
Meets the accuracy specifications for AC power supply in the range 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V
Effects of magnetic field: The fluctuation in external magnetic fields for AC (50/60 Hz) 400 A/m is
± (0.1% of rdg. + 10 digits) or less
Effects from the signal source resistance:
Effect from fluctuation in DC voltage and thermocouple signal source resistance of 1 k
Ω
DC voltage: 1 V range or less ± 10 µ V or less
2 V range or higher ± 0.15% of rdg. or less
Thermocouple: ± 10 µ V or less
RTD: Fluctuation per 10
Ω
change per line (3 lines all same resistance) for 100 Ω types: ± 0.1
° C or less; other than 100
Ω
types:
±
1.0
°
C or less; fluctuation resulting from difference in resistance
Effect of position: between lead wires of 40 m Ω (max. difference among three wires): approximately 0.1 ° C (for Pt100)
Horizontal with the feet at the bottom is the rule.
Effects of vibration: The fluctuation that results by applying a sinusoidal vibration along all three axes at a frequency between 10 to 60 Hz and an acceleration of 0.2 m/s
2
is ± (0.1% of rdg. + 1 digit) or less
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
–20 to 60
°
C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 ° C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50
°
C
5 to 30% RH for 50 to 60 ° C
External Dimensions
Units: mm
57 150.8
5-32
If not specified, the tolerance is ± 3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the tolerance is ± 0.3 mm.
IM MW100-01E
5.6
6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD
Resistance Input Module Specifications
Style number: S2
Type of measurement: DC voltage, 4-wire RTD, 4-wire resistance, DI (contact, LEVEL)
Number of inputs: 6
Input method:
A/D resolution:
Floating unbalanced input, insulation between channels
16 bits (
±
20000/
±
6000)
Measuring range and accuracy:
The accuracy applies to standard operating conditions:
Ambient temp: 23
±
2
°
C, ambient humidity: 55
±
10% RH, supply voltage: 90 to 250 VAC, power frequency: 50/60 Hz
±
1%, warmup time: at least 30 minutes, without adverse conditions such as vibrations.
Input
Measurement
Range
Type
DC voltage
RTD
5
(Measurement current: 1 mA)
20 mV
60 mV
200 mV
2 V
6 V
20 V
100 V
60mV (high res.)
1V
6V (high res.)
Pt100 1
JPt100
1
Pt100 (high res.)
JPt100 (high res.)
Ni100 SAMA
2
Ni100 DIN
2
Ni120
3
Pt50
Cu10 GE
4
Cu10 L&N
4
Cu10 WEED
4
Cu10 BAILEY
4
J263B
Cu10 at 20
°
C alpha=0.00392
Cu10 at 20
°
C alpha=0.00393
Cu25 at 0
°
C alpha=0.00425
Cu53 at 0
°
C alpha=
0.00426035
Cu100 at 0
°
C alpha=0.00425
Pt25
(JPt100/4)
Cu10 GE
(high resolution)
Cu10 L&N
(high resolution)
Cu10 WEED
(high resolution)
Cu10 BAILEY
(high resolution)
Pt100 GOST
Cu100 GOST
Cu50 GOST
Cu10 GOST
Rated
Measurement
Range
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
–100.00 to 100.00 V
0.000 to 60.000 mV
–1.0000 to 1.0000 V
0.0000 to 6.0000 V
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
–200.0 to 550.0
°
C
–140.00 to 150.00
°
C
–140.00 to 150.00
°
C
–200.0 to 250.0
°
C
–60.0 to 180.0
°
C
–70.0 to 200.0
°
C
–200.0 to 550.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
0.0 to 300.0K
–200.0 to 300.0
–200.0 to 300.0
–200.0 to 300.0
–50.0 to 150.0
–50.0 to 150.0
°
°
–200.0 to 300.0
–200.0 to 300.0
–200.0 to 300.0
°
°
°
C
C
C
C
C
–200.0 to 550.0
°
C
–200.0 to 300.0
°
C
°
°
°
C
C
C
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
–200.0 to 200.0
°
C
–200.0 to 200.0
°
C
–200.0 to 200.0
°
C
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms or More
±
(0.05% of rdg + 5 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 5 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 20 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 2 digits)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 20 digits)
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
(0.1% of rdg + 2
°
C)
(0.05% of rdg + 0.3K)
(0.1% of rdg + 2
(0.1% of rdg + 2
°
°
C)
(0.1% of rdg + 0.5
(0.1% of rdg + 0.5
°
(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
°
C)
°
°
°
°
C)
C)
C)
C)
C)
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
°
C)
±
(0.05% of rdg + 0.3
°
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 2
°
C)
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 1.67 ms
(0.1% of rdg + 25digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 10digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 100 digits)
(0.1% of rdg + 10 digits)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 100 digits)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
(0.2% of rdg + 5
°
C)
(0.1% of rdg + 1.5K)
(0.2% of rdg + 5
(0.2% of rdg + 2
°
°
°
C)
C)
C)
(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
(0.2% of rdg + 2
(0.2% of rdg + 5
°
°
°
°
°
C)
C)
C)
C)
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
°
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
°
C)
±
(0.1% of rdg + 1.5
°
C)
±
(0.2% of rdg + 5
°
C)
1 Pt50: JIS C 1604-1981, JIS C 1606-1986/Pt100: JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989, IEC 751, DIN IEC 751/
JPt100: JIS C 1604-1981, JIS C 1606-1989
2 SAMA/DIN
3 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY
4 Guaranteed accuracy range Cu10 GE: –84.4 to 170.0
°
C/Cu10 L&N: –75.0 to 150.0
°
C/Cu10 WEED: –20.0 to 250.0
°
C/
Cu10 BAILEY: –20.0 to 250.0
°
C
5. 4-wire RTD, 4-wire resistance
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1K
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
Highest
Resolution
(1 Digit)
1
µ
V
10
µ
V
10
µ
V
100
µ
V
1 mV
1 mV
10 mV
1
µ
V
100
µ
V
100
µ
V
0.1
°
C
0.01
°
C
0.1
°
C
0.1
°
C
IM MW100-01E
5-33
5
5.6 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Specifications
5-34
Input
Measurement
Range
Type
Rated
Measurement
Range
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 16.67 ms or More
Measurement Accuracy
Integration Time: 1.67 ms
RTD
3
(Measurement current: 0.25 mA)
Pt500
2
Pt1000
2
–200.0 to 600.0
°
C
±(0.05% of rdg + 3digits)
±(0.1% of rdg + 1.5digits)
Resistance
20
Ω
(Measurement current 1 mA)
200
Ω
(Measurement current 1 mA)
2 k
Ω
(Measurement current 0.25 mA)
0.000 to 20.000
0.00 to 200.00
0.0 to 2000.0
Ω
Ω
Ω
±(0.05% of rdg + 7digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 3digits)
±(0.05% of rdg + 3digits)
±(0.1% of rdg + 25digits)
±(0.1% of rdg + 15digits)
±(0.1% of rdg + 10digits)
DI
Level
Contact input
Vth = 2.4 V
Threshold level accuracy: ±0.1 V
ON for 100
Ω
or less, OFF for 10 k
Ω
or more 1
1 Measured using a measurement current of approximately 10
µ
A at 200 mV range. Threshold level is approximately 0.1 V.
2 The Pt500 resistance table is Pt100
×
5, and the resistance table for Pt1000 is Pt100
×
10
3 4-wire RTD, 4-wire resistance.
Highest
Resolution
(1 Digit)
0.1
°
C
0.001
Ω
0.01
Ω
0.1
Ω
Measurement interval, integration time, and filter:
Measurement
Interval
Integration
Time
Filter
Rejected Noise and Notes
100 ms
200 ms
1.67 ms 600 Hz and its integer multiples
1
500 ms
1 s
2 s
5 s
10, 20, 30, 60 s
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto
2
36.67 ms
100 ms
3
200 ms 4
200 ms
Rectangular
Trapezoidal
Rectangular
Cos
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.67 or 20 ms
50 Hz, 60 Hz and their integer multiples
10 Hz and its integer multiples
Fc = 5-Hz low-pass filter
1
When the measurement interval is 100 ms and 200 ms, measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency
noise is not rejected. In such cases, set the measurement interval to 500 ms or more.
2
For DC power, set to 20 ms.
3 When synchronizing time by SNTP, the integral time is set to 36.67 ms. Also in this case, noise of 50 Hz, 60 Hz, and
their integer multiples is rejected.
4 When synchronizing time by SNTP, the integral time is set to 100 ms. Also in this case, noise of 10 Hz and its integer
multiples is rejected.
Maximum input voltage:
DC voltage at 1-V range or less, RTD, resistance, and DI
(contact):
±
10 VDC (continuous)
Other measurement ranges: ± 120 VDC (continuous)
Normal-mode voltage
DC voltage, DI (LEVEL): 1.2 times the range rating or less (50/60
Hz, peak value including the signal component)
Resistance 2 k Ω , RTD 100 Ω , 500 Ω : 1000 Ω types: 50 mVpeak
Resistance 200
Ω
, RTD 10
Ω
, 25
Ω
: 50
Ω
types: 10 mVpeak
Resistance 20 Ω : 4 mVpeak
Normal-mode rejection ratio:
For integration time of 16.67 ms or more: 40 dB or more (50/60
Hz ± 0.1%)
For integration time of 1.67 ms: 50/60 Hz is not rejected
Common-mode voltage:600 VACrms (50/60 Hz), reinforced (double) insulation
Common mode rejection ratio (50/60 Hz ± 0.1%, 500 Ω unbalanced between minus measurement terminal and ground. The RTD and resistance ranges indicate the voltage conversion value when current flows)
When the integration time is 16.67 ms or more: 120 dB or more
When the integration time is 1.67 ms: 80 dB or more
Common-mode voltage between channels:
DC voltage, DI: 120 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
RTD, resistance: 50 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
IM MW100-01E
5.6 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Specifications
Noise rejection: Rejection by the integrating A/D converter and the use of low pass filters
Input resistance: For DC voltage 1 V range or less: 10 M
Ω
or less
For DC voltage 2 V range or higher: Approx. 1 M Ω
Insulation resistance: Between input terminal and earth terminal: 20 M Ω or more (500
Input bias current:
VDC)
10 nA or less
Withstand voltage: 1000 VACrms (50/60 Hz) for one minute between input terminals
(DC voltage and DI)
620 VACrms (50/60 Hz) for one minute between input terminals
(RTD and resistance)
3700 VACrms (50/60 Hz) for one minute between the input terminal and earth terminal
Input signal source resistance:
DC voltage: 2 k
Ω
or less
Resistance and RTD ranges: 10 Ω or less per line (same for all ranges)
Shunt capacity: 0.01 µ F or less (when using RTD and resistance ranges)
Power consumption: Approx. 1.2 W
External dimensions: Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal cover)
Weight: Approx. 0.5kg.
Terminal type: Clamp, terminal board is detachable
Applicable wire size: 0.14 to 1.5 mm
2
(AWG26 to 16)
Effects of Operating Conditions
The specifications below apply when the integration time is 16.67 ms or more.
Warm-up time: At least 30 minutes after power-up
Effects of ambient temperature:
The effect received by changes in 10 degree increments of the ambient temperature is ± (0.05% of rdg. + 0.05% of range) or less.
However, for Cu10 Ω : ± (0.2% of range + 1 digit)
Effects of power fluctuation:
Meets the accuracy specifications for AC power supply in the range 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V
Effects of magnetic field: The fluctuation in external magnetic fields for AC (50/60 Hz) 400
A/m is ± (0.1% of rdg. + 10 digits) or less
Effects from the signal source resistance: Effect from fluctuation in DC voltage signal source resistance of 1 k
Ω
1 V range or less
2 V range or higher
±
±
10 µ V or less
0.15% of rdg. or less
Effect of position:
RTD: Fluctuation from 10 Ω change per line
1000 Ω , 100 Ω types: ± 0.1
° C or less
Other than 1000 Ω , 100 Ω types: ± 1.0
° C or less
Resistance: Fluctuation from 10
Ω
change per line:
±
1 digit or less
Horizontal with the feet at the bottom is the rule.
Effects of vibration: The fluctuation that results by applying a sinusoidal vibration along all three axes at a frequency between 10 to 60 Hz and an acceleration of 0.2 m/s
2
is ± (0.1% of rdg. + 1 digit) or less
5
IM MW100-01E
5-35
5.6 6-CH, Medium-Speed Four-Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Specifications
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
–20 to 60 ° C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40
°
C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50 ° C
5 to 30% RH for 50 to 60 ° C
External Dimensions
57
150.8
Units: mm
If not specified, the tolerance is ± 3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the tolerance is
±
0.3 mm.
5-36
IM MW100-01E
5.7
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module
Specifications
Style number:
Number of inputs:
Input type:
Input method:
S2
4
Strain gauge or strain gauge type sensors (static strain)
Floating balanced input isolated between channels (NDIS is nonisolated)
Measurement range and accuracy:
The accuracy applies to standard operating conditions:
Ambient temp: 23 ± 2 ° C, ambient humidity: 55 ± 10% RH, supply voltage: 90 to 250 VAC, power frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 1%, warmup time: at least 30 minutes, without adverse conditions such as vibrations.
One-Gauge Method Conversion
Input
Measurement
Range
Type
Rated
Measurement
Range
Integration time:
16.67 ms or more
Strain
2000
µ
Strain
20000
µ
Strain
200000
µ
Strain
±2000.0
±20000
*1 Display resolution is 0.1
µ
Strain
*2 Display resolution is 1
µ
Strain
µ
±200000
µ
Strain
µ
Strain
Strain
AD resolution:
Measurement Accuracy
±0.5% of range
±0.3% of range
±0.3% of range
Resolution
0.1
µ
Strain
1
µ
Strain
10
µ
Strain
Equivalent to ± 20000 FS display
Integration time:
1.67 ms or more
Measurement Accuracy
2% of range
1% of range
1% of range
However, excludes 1.67 ms integration time
AD integration time:
Resolution
1
µ
Strain
2
µ
Strain
10
µ
Strain
*1
*2
Measurement
Interval
Integration
Time
Filter
Rejected Noise and Notes
100 ms
200 ms
1.67 ms
16.67 ms
20 ms
Auto 2
Rectangular
600 Hz and its integer multiples
60 Hz and its integer multiples
50 Hz and its integer multiples
1
Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16.67 or 20 ms
500 ms
1 s
2 s
5, 10, 20, 30, 60 s
36.67 ms
100 ms
200 ms
3
200 ms
Trapezoidal
Rectangular
Cos
50 Hz, 60 Hz and their integer multiples
10 Hz and its integer multiples
Fc = 5-Hz low-pass filter
1
When the measurement interval is 100 ms, measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency
noise is not rejected. In such cases, set the measurement interval to 200 ms or more.
2
For DC power, set to 20 ms.
3 When synchronizing time by SNTP, the integral time is set to 100 ms. Also in this case, noise of 10 Hz and its integer
multiples is rejected.
Gauge connection method:
1-gauge (2 or 3 wire systems), opposing 2 gauge, adjacent 2- or
4-gauge
With clamp terminals, set on a channel basis with switches
Applicable gauge resistance: 100 to 1000 Ω
120
Ω
for -B12; 350
Ω
, built-in resistance for -B35
Bridge voltage: Fixed at 2 VDC. Accuracy ± 5% compensated with internal Cal
Applicable gauge factor:
Fixed at 2.0. Gauge factor can be compensated with the scaling function
Balance adjustment: Automatic, digital calculation methods
Balance adjustment range:
± 10000 µ strain (1 gauge method conversion)
Balance adjustment accuracy:
The measurement accuracy or less
Resistance accuracy for bridge:
Input resistance:
± 0.01% ± 5ppm/ ° C
1 M Ω or more.
5-37
IM MW100-01E
5
5.7 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module Specifications
Allowable wiring resistance:
100 Ω or less
Effect of wiring resistance:
NDIS 50 ppm of rdg. / Ω (when using remote sensing wire)
Does not compensate for clamp wiring resistance. Depends on the gauge resistance.
Allowable input voltage:
±
10 VDC (between H-L) continuous
Allowable common-mode voltage: Channel-to-channel: 30 VACrms
Between input and ground: 250 VACrms (-B12, -B35), 30
VACrms (-NDI)
However, NDIS connector shell is connected to earth potential.
Common-mode rejection ratio
*
:
When the integration time is 16.67 ms or more: 120 dB or more.
When the integration time is 1.67 ms: 80 dB or more
(voltage conversion value at 50/60 Hz ± 0.1%, bridge voltage of 2
V)
Normal mode rejection ratio:
For integral time of 16.67 ms or more: 40 dB or more (50/60 Hz ±
0.1%)
For integral time of 1.67: 50/60 Hz is not rejected.
(voltage conversion value given a bridge voltage of 2 V)
Insulation resistance
*
: Between input and earth
Withstand voltage
*
: Between input and earth
20 M
Ω
or more (500 VDC)
2300 VAC for one minute
Channel-to-channel: 30 VACrms or less
Power consumption: Approx. 3 W (one module)
Weight: Approx. 0.5kg.
External dimensions: Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal cover)
Terminal type: -B12, -B35: Clamp, terminal board is detachable
-NDI: NDIS, detachable by channel
Applicable wire size: 0.14 to 1.5 mm
2
(AWG26 to 16) (excluding -NDI)
* Does not apply to the NDIS terminal.
Effects of Operating Conditions
The specifications below apply when the integration time is 16.67 ms or more.
Warm-up time: At least 30 minutes after power-up
Effects of ambient temperature:
The effect received by changes in 10
°
C increments of the ambient temperature is
± (0.1% of range) or less
Effects of power fluctuation:
Meets the accuracy specifications for AC power supply in the range 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V
Effects of magnetic field:
Effect of position:
The fluctuation in external magnetic fields for AC (50/60 Hz) 400
A/m is ± 2% of range or less
Horizontal with the feet at the bottom is the rule.
5-38
IM MW100-01E
5.7 4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module Specifications
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
–20 to 60 ° C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40
°
C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50 ° C
5 to 30% RH for 50 to 60 ° C
External Dimensions
Units: mm
-B12, -B35
57
150.8
-NDI
57 133.8
4.8
5
If not specified, the tolerance is ± 3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the tolerance is ± 0.3 mm.
IM MW100-01E
5-39
5.8
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module
Specifications
Style number:
Input type:
Number of inputs:
Input format:
S1(-D05), S2(-D24)
-D05: Contact (non-voltage contact, open collector) and LEVEL
(5-V logic)
-D24: LEVEL (24-V logic)
10
-D05: Pull up at approx. 5 V/approx. 5 k Ω , non-isolated between channels
-D24: No isolation between channels
Measurement interval: Select 10 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s,
Filter
20 s, 30 s, or 60 s
Measurement interval of 5 s or less: Use the wider of the ON/OFF width of the detection period (approximately 75% to 90% of the measurement interval)
Measurement interval of 5 s or more: Use the wider of the ON/
OFF width of approximately 4.5 s
Minimum detection pulse width: Twice the sampling interval or more
Input threshold level: -D05: Contact (non-voltage contact, open collector):
100 Ω or less, ON, 100 k Ω or more, OFF
LEVEL (5-V logic): OFF at 1 V or less and ON at 3 V or more
Hysteresis width:
-D24: LEVEL (24-V logic): OFF at 6 V or less and ON at 16 V or greater
-D05: Approx. 0.1 V -D24: Approx. 1.5 V
Contact transistor rating: 15 VDC or greater and 30 mA or greater
Transistor with a rating of Vce > 15 VDC and Ic > 30 mA
Maximum input voltage: -D05: ± 10 V -D24: ± 50 V
Insulation resistance: Between input terminals and ground: 20 M Ω or more (500 VDC)
Withstand Voltage 2300 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between input and earth
Maximum common mode voltage: 250 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
Terminal type: Clamp
Power consumption: Approx. 1.5 W
Applicable wire size: 0.14 to 1.5 mm
2
(AWG26 to 16)
External dimensions: Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal cover)
Weight:
General Specifications
Approximately 0.5kg.
Operating temperature range: –20 to 60 ° C
Operating humidity range: 20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 ° C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50 ° C
5 to 30% RH for 50 to 60 ° C
External Dimensions
57 150.8
Units: mm
5-40
If not specified, the tolerance is ± 3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the tolerance is ± 0.3 mm.
IM MW100-01E
5.9
8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog Output Module
Specifications
Style number: S2
Number of outputs: 8
Update interval: 100 ms minimum (not synchronized to the measurement interval)
Output types: DC voltage, DC current (external 24-V power supply required when using current output)
Rated output range: Voltage: –10 to 10 V
Current: 0 to 20 mA sourcing (for 1 to 5 V output, 4 to 20 mA is output)
Maximum allowable output range:
Voltage: –11 to 11 V Current: 0 to 22 mA
Load impedance:
Accuracy:
Voltage: 5 k Ω or more Current: 600 Ω or less.
± 0.2% of F.S. at the rated output range or less (F.S. = 10 V or 20 mA). However, for current output, accuracy is met at 1 mA or more.
The accuracy applies to standard operating conditions:
Ambient temp: 23
±
2
°
C, ambient humidity: 55
±
10% RH, supply voltage: 90 to 250 VAC, power frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 1%, warmup time: at least 30 minutes, without adverse conditions such as vibrations.
Output resolution: 12 bits of F.S. or more
Resolution –10.000 V to 10.000 V (1 mV resolution)
0.000 mA to 20.000 mA (1
µ
A resolution)
Effects of ambient temperature:
± (50 ppm of Setting + 50 ppm of F.S.) per degree 1 ° C or less
(F.S. = 10 V or 20 mA)
External power supply: 24 V ± 10% (required when using current output)
Connect a device with capacity of 250 mA or more.
Insulation resistance: Between output terminals and earth terminal: 20 M
Ω
or more
(500 VDC)
Across output terminals: non-isolated (- terminal common potential)
Withstand voltage: 2300 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between the output terminal and earth.
Across output terminals: non-isolated (-terminal common potential).
Power consumption: Approx. 2.5 W (not including power consumption of external power supply).
Terminal type: Clamp, attached and removed in units of 4 channels
Applicable wire size: 0.08 to 2.5 mm
2
(AWG28 to 12)
External dimensions: Approx. 57 (W)
×
131 (H)
×
151 (D) mm (including the terminal cover)
Weight: Approx. 0.5 kg.
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
–20 to 50
°
C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 ° C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50
°
C
5
5-41
IM MW100-01E
5.9 8-CH, Medium-Speed Analog Output Module Specifications
External Dimensions
57
150.8
Units: mm
If not specified, the tolerance is ± 3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the tolerance is
±
0.3 mm.
Output Span Setting
Limit value of V mode and mA mode
Modes Output lower limit
*
V mode mA mode
–11[V]
0[mA]
* –OVER, preset value
** + OVER, preset value
Setting span lower limit
–10[V]
0[mA]
Setting span upper limit
+10[V]
20[mA]
Output upper limit
**
+11[V]
22[mA]
Handling Abnormal Data
Abnormal Data Types
Data upon startup
Data upon error occurrence
+OVER
–OVER
Output value
Preset value or previously held value can be selected
Preset value or previously held value can be selected
5% of output Full Span
–5% of output Full Span
±
OVER conditions
• When the input channel is ± OVER in the case of transmission output
• When outside the range of voltage –11 V to +11 V, or current 0 mA to 22 mA
(accuracy assured at 1 mA or more)
5-42
IM MW100-01E
5.10 8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM Output Module
Specifications
Style number: S2
Number of outputs: 8
Update interval: 100 ms minimum (not synchronized to the measurement interval)
Output interval: 1 ms to 300 s (can be set channel by channel)
However,
1 ms interval setting range: 1 ms to 30.000 s (can be set in units of 1 ms)
Output types:
Update timing:
10 ms interval setting range: 10 ms to 300.00 s (can be set in units of 10 ms)
Pulse width:
After receiving change command, duty is changed from falling of the next interval
Pulse interval accuracy: ± 100ppm of Setting
External power supply: 4 to 28V
Insulation resistance: Between output terminals and earth terminal: 20 M Ω or more
(500 VDC)
Withstand voltage
Duty resolution:
Across output terminals: non-isolated
2300 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between the output terminal and earth
Across output terminals: non-isolated
1 ms interval setting range: 12000
10 ms interval setting range: 60000
Set at 0 to 100.000% (0.001% resolution)
Duty accuracy (at a load resistance 100 Ω or less):
For 1 ms interval setting range, ± 0.017% or ± 2 µ s whichever is longer
For 10 ms interval setting range, ± 0.0035% or ± 2 µ s whichever is longer
Output format:
ON resistance:
Output capacity:
When the load resistance is greater than 100 Ω , the output duty can shift.
External power supply sourcing
2 Ω or less, when output current is 200 mA or more.
1A/ch max, however, 4 A or less total for all modules
*, **
* A 1A current limit circuit is built in to the output circuit. Once the current limit circuit is ON, the circuit continues to operate unless the external power supply is turned OFF (maintains the output OFF status)
After turning OFF external power supplies, check the load, then start up the external power supply again.
** This module has a built-in fuse.
The built-in fuse protects against fires or abnormal emissions of heat due to load shortages or other abnormalities. It does not protect against damage to internal circuits.
Power consumption: Approx. 2.5 W (not including power consumption of external power supply)
Terminal type: Clamp, attached and removed in units of 4 channels
Applicable wire size: 0.08 to 2.5 mm
2
(AWG28 to 12)
External dimensions: Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal cover)
Weight: Approx. 0.5kg.
5-43
IM MW100-01E
5
5.10 8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM Output Module Specifications
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
–20 to 50 ° C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40
°
C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50 ° C
External Dimensions
57
150.8
Units: mm
If not specified, the tolerance is
±
3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the tolerance is ± 0.3 mm.
Handling Abnormal Data
Abnormal Data Types
Data upon startup
Data upon error occurrence
+OVER
–OVER
Output value
Preset value or previously held value can be selected
Preset value or previously held value can be selected
Duty: +5% of the output Full Span
Duty: –5% of the output Full Span
±
OVER conditions
• When duty exceeds 0.000 to 100.000%
• When the input channel is ± OVER in the case of transmission output
5-44
IM MW100-01E
5.11 Operations Common to the 8-CH Medium-
Speed Analog Output Module and the 8-CH
Medium Speed PWM Output Module
Settings Related Specifications (by Module)
Setting channel Setting Contents
(Module)
Settings
Output Channel Span
(AO, PWM)
AO(V) –10.000 to 10.000V —
Setting range AO(mA) 0.000 to -20.000 mA
Remarks
—
PWM 0.000 to 100.000%
Preset value AO(V) –11.000 to 11.000V —
Setting range AO(mA) 0.000 to 22.000 mA
PWM 0.000 to 100.000%
Command output specification
Max value also same as range on left
Setting span (minimum and maximum) specified in reverse
Setting span (minimum, maximum) same value specification
Yes
No
—
—
Overview of Output Operation When Setting Holding of Previous Value of
Transmission Output
Previous value Previous value
(held)
Value held
Output value
Power ON Measurement start
Measurement stop
(or Transmission output
execute disabled)
Measurement restarts
(or Transmission output
execute enabled)
5
5-45
IM MW100-01E
5.12 10-CH, Medium-Speed Digital Output Module
Specifications
Style number: S1
Number of outputs: 10
Contact mode: A contact (SPST)
Update interval: 100 ms minimum (not synchronized to the measurement interval)
Contact capacity:
Contact life*:
250 VDC/0.1 A, 250 VAC/2 A, or 30 VDC/2A (resistance load)
100,000 times at rated load (typical)
20,000,000 times at no load (typical)
* The contact life varies depending on the load conditions and the environment in which it is used.
Insulation resistance: Between output terminals and earth terminal: 20 M
Ω
or more
(500 VDC)
Withstand Voltage
Between output terminals: 20 M Ω or more (500 VDC)
2300 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between the output terminal and earth
2300 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute between output terminals
Maximum common-mode voltage:
250 VACrms (50/60 Hz)
Power consumption: Approx. 2 W (when all relays are turned ON)
Terminal type: Clamp, attached and removed in units of 5 channels
Applicable wire size: 0.08 to 2.5 mm
2
(AWG28 to 12)
External dimensions: Approx. 57 (W) × 131 (H) × 151 (D) mm (including the terminal cover)
Weight: Approx. 0.5kg.
General Specifications
Operating temperature range:
Operating humidity range:
–20 to 50 ° C
20 to 80% RH for –20 to 40 ° C
10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50
°
C
External Dimensions
Units: mm
57
150.8
5-46
If not specified, the tolerance is
±
3%. However, in cases of less than 10 mm, the tolerance is ± 0.3 mm.
IM MW100-01E
Appendix
Appendix 1 Supported Characters
D
E
B
C
F
9
A
7
8
5
6
3
4
When entering characters on the MW100 from a browser, the following characters can be used. There are limits to which characters can be used depending on the type of entry item. For information on the characters can that can be used in communication commands, see the MW100 Communication Command manual (IM MW100-17E).
0
0 1 2
SP
3
0
4
@
5
Upper 4 bits
6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
P p
1
2
!
1
2
A
B
Q
R a b q r
#
%
&
5
6
3
4
E
F
C
D
U
V
S
T e f c d u v s t
.
/
(
)
∗
+
-
7
8
9
<
=
>
G
H
I
J
M
N
K
L
O
Y
Z
W
X
[
^
]
_ g h j i k l m n o w x y z
{
}
~
|
User Specified Strings
Alphanumeric English characters can be entered.
Passwords
Alphanumeric English characters can be entered. However, the following characters may not be used.
Space “blank”, and asterisk “ ∗ ”
Host Name, Domain Name, and Server Name
Alphanumeric English characters and hyphens “ -”, periods “ .”, and underscores “ _” can be used.
File Name
Alphanumeric English characters and “#”, “%”, “(”, “)”, “-”, “@”, and “_” can be used.
However, the following character combinations may not be used.
“AUX”, “CON”, “PRN”, “NUL”, and “CLOCK”
Appendix-1
App
IM MW100-01E
Index
Index
Symbols
Page
1 Gauge 3 Wire Method .................................................... 2-11
1 Gauge Method ............................................................... 2-11
10-CH, High-Speed Digital Input Module ........ 1-5, 1-35, 5-40
Output Module ......................................... 1-6, 1-42, 5-46
Input Module ............................................ 1-4, 1-26, 5-29
4 Gauge Method ............................................................... 2-13
4-CH, High-Speed Universal Input Module ..... 1-4, 1-23, 5-25
4-CH, Medium-Speed Strain Input Module ............... 1-5, 5-37
6-CH, Medium-Speed, 4-Wire RTD Resistance
Input Module ...................................................... 1-4, 5-33
7-Segment LED ........................................................ 1-11, 4-1
Output Module ......................................... 1-6, 1-36, 5-41
8-CH, Medium-Speed PWM Output Module ... 1-6, 1-37, 5-43
A
Page
A/D Integration Time list .................................................... 3-13
absolute time timer ........................................ 1-18, 3-28, 5-22
AC adapter ........................................................................ 2-19
acquisition conditions ........................................................ 3-13
action function ......................................................... 1-19, 5-22
action setting ..................................................................... 3-22
action type ......................................................................... 3-27
address ............................................................................. 2-27
address setting software ..................................................... 1-7
adjacent 2 gauge method ................................................. 2-12
administrator privileges ..................................................... 1-15
alarm ack ................................................................ 3-12, 3-38
alarm channel set .............................................................. 3-33
alarm hold/non-hold .......................................................... 1-14
alarm notification ............................................................... 3-33
alarm output timing ........................................................... 1-14
alarm status hold ............................................................... 3-11
alarm summaries .............................................................. 5-21
alarms ............................................................................... 1-13
allowable input voltage ...................................................... 5-38
antistatic metal .................................................................. 2-31
arithmetic functions ........................................................... 1-45
auto zone .......................................................................... 3-39
B
Page
bar graph ........................................................................... 3-40
base plate ................................................................. 1-6, 5-24
basic math ......................................................................... 1-44
baud rate ........................................................................... 2-27
browser ............................................................................... 3-1
burnout .................................................................... 1-13, 3-17
C
Page
calibration of temperature measurements ........................ 4-16
IM MW100-01E
calibration procedure ........................................................ 4-12
calibration software ............................................................. 1-7
capacity of the CF card ..................................................... 1-17
CF card ............................................................................. 1-17
channel numbers ................................................................ 2-5
channel setting .................................................................... 3-2
chattering .......................................................................... 1-35
CLOG computation ........................................................... 3-14
CLOG functions ................................................................ 1-45
command output ............................................................... 1-36
commercial power supply ................................................. 2-28
common specifications ........................................................ 5-1
communication .................................................................... 5-9
communication command error .......................................... 4-6
communication error ........................................................... 4-7
communication errors ......................................................... 4-2
communication input channels ............................................ 5-4
communication input data ................................................. 3-20
communication setting ........................................................ 3-3
communication specifications ........................................... 1-15
communication test ........................................................... 3-12
communication timeout function ....................................... 3-35
computed data .................................................................. 1-17
conditional expressions ..................................................... 1-46
connecting signal wires ....................................................... 2-6
connector .................................................................. 1-10, 2-4
converter ........................................................................... 2-24
cutoff frequency ................................................................ 2-30
D
Page
data acquisition logs ......................................................... 5-21
data length ........................................................................ 2-27
data transfer settings .......................................................... 3-5
date and time ...................................................................... 3-9
DC voltage .................................................... 1-23, 1-26, 1-29
DC voltage/current standard ................................... 4-12, 4-16
DE_EN .............................................................................. 3-22
dedicated protocol ............................................................... 5-9
desktop ............................................................................... 2-3
DHCP .................................................................................. 5-9
DHCP client function ......................................................... 1-15
DI ............................................................................ 1-30, 1-35
differential computation between channels ....................... 1-12
differential input settings ................................................... 3-16
DIN rail ................................................................................ 2-3
dip switch ................................................................ 1-10, 2-21
direct data length .............................................................. 3-14
display ............................................................... 1-11, 3-1, 5-9
display colors .................................................................... 3-42
display groups settings ..................................................... 3-43
display scale settings ........................................................ 3-42
display setting ..................................................................... 3-3
DNS .................................................................................... 5-9
DNS client settings ............................................................ 3-32
dual screen ....................................................................... 3-37
Index-1
Index
Index
E
Page
E-mail format ..................................................................... 5-16
E-mail function ........................................................ 1-15, 1-21
E-mail retransmission ....................................................... 1-22
ENERG ............................................................................. 3-22
energize ............................................................................ 1-42
energize setting ................................................................. 3-22
entering expressions ......................................................... 3-18
error display ...................................................... 3-12, 4-1, 4-8
errors upon startup .............................................................. 4-1
ethernet cable ................................................................... 2-21
ethernet communication .................................................... 1-15
ethernet port ...................................................... 2-21, 3-1, 5-9
event detection method ........................................... 1-19, 3-27
event type ......................................................................... 3-27
event/action function ......................................................... 5-21
event/action setting ........................................................... 3-27
execution sequence .......................................................... 5-22
external dimensions ................. 5-1, 5-23, 5-24, 5-28, 5-32,
5-36, 5-39, 5-40, 5-42, 5-44, 5-46
F
Page
file creation notification ..................................................... 3-34
file name ............................................................................. 5-6
file size calculation .............................................................. 5-7
filter settings ...................................................................... 3-17
filters ....................................................................... 1-12, 1-35
first-order lag filter ................................................... 1-12, 2-30
flag .................................................................................... 3-27
flag input channels .................................................... 1-46, 5-4
floor ..................................................................................... 2-3
flow of operation .................................................................. 1-8
format ...................................................................... 1-18, 3-10
format type ........................................................................ 5-23
FTP ..................................................................................... 5-9
FTP client settings ............................................................ 3-32
FTP function ...................................................................... 1-15
full zone ............................................................................. 3-39
G
Page
general specifications ...................... 5-23, 5-28, 5-32, 5-36,
group reset ........................................................................ 1-48
H
Page
handshaking ............................................................ 2-25, 2-27
high limit on rate-of-change alarm .................................... 1-13
hold operation ................................................................... 1-42
hold setting ........................................................................ 3-22
HTTP ................................................................................... 5-9
hysteresis ................................................................ 1-13, 3-21
I
Page
in-progress display ............................................................ 1-11
initial balancing ............................................. 1-32, 3-12, 3-17
initialization of the CF card ................................................ 5-23
initializing settings ................................................... 2-21, 5-22
Index-2
input mode ........................................................................ 3-16
input/output modules ........................................................... 1-4
instrument number ................................................................ iv
internet explorer 5.5 ............................................................ 3-1
IP address ........................................................................... 3-4
ITU-T ................................................................................. 2-25
J
Page
java ..................................................................................... 3-1
JRE ..................................................................................... 3-1
K
Page
keep alive function ............................................................ 3-35
key lock function ..................................................... 1-10, 5-20
key lock status .................................................................. 1-11
key operation .................................................................... 3-12
L
Page
lifespan .............................................................................. 4-17
limit for media alarm .......................................................... 3-14
list of services ..................................................................... 5-9
loading settings ................................................................. 3-36
log information .............................................. 1-20, 3-44, 5-21
logical operations .............................................................. 1-44
login function ............................................................. 1-15, 3-8
loss of computed data ......................................................... 5-4
low limit on rate-of-change alarm ...................................... 1-13
low-pass filter .................................................................... 2-30
lower limit alarm ................................................................ 1-13
M
Page
mail client settings ............................................................. 3-33
Main Module ............................................................... 1-4, 1-9
Main Module Specifications ................................................ 5-2
main protocols ..................................................................... 5-9
match time .................................................... 1-18, 3-28, 5-22
MATH ................................................................................ 1-12
math channel settings ....................................................... 3-18
math clear ......................................................................... 3-38
math constants .................................................................. 3-19
math error data processing ............................................... 1-49
math function .................................................................... 1-44
math function specifications ................................................ 5-3
math groups ............................................................ 1-48, 3-19
math interval ..................................................................... 1-48
math interval settings ........................................................ 3-13
math operation .................................................................. 3-18
math output value ............................................................... 5-4
math reference channels .................................................. 1-46
math reset ......................................................................... 3-38
math settings ..................................................................... 3-13
math span ......................................................................... 1-48
math types ........................................................................ 1-44
maximum allowable output range ..................................... 5-41
maximum input voltage ....................... 5-27, 5-31, 5-34, 5-40
measured data .................................................................. 1-17
IM MW100-01E
measurement .................................................................... 1-12
measurement group settings ............................................ 3-13
measurement groups ........................................................ 1-12
measurement input types .......... 1-23, 1-26, 1-29, 1-31, 1-35
measurement interval ......................... 1-12, 1-28, 1-30, 1-31
measurement mode .................................................. 1-14, 3-3
measurement module settings .......................................... 3-13
measurement synchronization ............ 1-25, 1-28, 1-30, 1-31
measures against noise .................................................... 2-28
measuring range ....................... 1-23, 1-26, 1-29, 1-31, 1-35
mechanical specifications ................................................... 5-1
media alarm notification .................................................... 3-34
message ........................................................................... 3-38
message settings .............................................................. 3-41
meter ................................................................................. 3-40
modbus client function ............................................ 1-15, 5-15
modbus client setting .................................................. 3-7, 3-8
modbus master function .......................................... 1-16, 5-11
modbus master setting ........................................................ 3-6
modbus server function ........................................... 1-16, 5-15
modbus settings .................................................................. 3-6
modbus slave function ............................................ 1-16, 5-13
modbus/RTU ................................................... 1-16, 3-6, 5-10
modbus/TCP ............................................................... 3-6, 5-9
model .................................................................................... iv
module errors ...................................................................... 4-1
module information ............................................................. 3-9
modus slave function ........................................................ 5-11
monitor-display .................................................................. 3-37
N
Page
NO. (instrument number) ...................................................... iv
non-hold ............................................................................ 1-42
normal operating conditions ................................................ 5-1
numerical display .............................................................. 3-40
O
Page
OFF-OFF .......................................................................... 2-25
operation error display ...................................................... 1-11
operation modes ............................................................... 1-14
operation upon error occurrence ....................................... 3-25
operation upon startup and error occurrence .................... 1-37
opposing 2 gauge 3 wire method ...................................... 2-13
opposing 2 gauge method ................................................ 2-12
optional accessories ............................................................. vii
order of operations in expressions .................................... 1-46
OS (operating system) ........................................................ 3-1
output action setting .......................................................... 3-23
output channel .................................................................. 3-38
output format ..................................................................... 1-38
output method ......................................................... 1-36, 1-37
output on disabled channels ............................................. 1-38
output operation during calibration .................................... 1-36
output operation per settings and setting changes ........... 1-38
output operation settings ................................................... 3-25
output range ............................................................ 1-36, 1-37
output range settings (analog output) ............................... 3-23
output range settings (PWM output) ................................. 3-24
output relays ..................................................................... 1-42
output types .................... 1-36, 1-37, 1-42, 3-23, 5-41, 5-43
IM MW100-01E
Index
output update interval ................................... 1-36, 1-37, 1-42
output upon startup and error occurrence ......................... 1-38
output waveform ............................................................... 1-37
P
Page
parity check ....................................................................... 2-27
PASV mode ...................................................................... 3-32
pause ................................................................................ 3-38
PC hardware ....................................................................... 3-1
PC software ........................................................................ 1-7
periodic report ................................................................... 3-34
pin assignments ................................................................ 2-25
POP3 server ..................................................................... 3-33
power consumption ........................................................... 5-23
power cord ........................................................................ 2-17
power failure notification ................................................... 3-34
power ON operation .......................................................... 3-25
power supply ..................................................................... 2-17
power supply terminal ............................................. 2-18, 2-19
pre-trigger ......................................................................... 3-14
preset value ............................................................ 3-23, 3-24
pretrigger function ............................................................. 1-18
primary and secondary boxes ........................................... 3-32
processing and operation .................................................. 3-12
program channel ............................................................... 3-20
program channels ............................................................. 1-47
R
Page
range calibration ............................................................... 4-12
rate of change interval ...................................................... 3-11
rated power supply voltage ................................................. 5-1
receive data control ........................................................... 2-25
receiver settings .................................................................. 3-5
recipient ............................................................................ 3-33
recorder structure ................................................................ 5-5
recording channel settings ................................................ 3-15
recording channels .............................................................. 5-6
recording operation ........................................................... 1-17
recording operation settings .............................................. 3-14
recording start operation ................................................... 1-18
reference junction compensation ............................ 3-17, 4-16
reflash function .................................................................. 1-43
reflash setting .................................................................... 3-22
relational operations .......................................................... 1-45
relative time timer .......................................... 1-18, 3-28, 5-22
relay excitation state ......................................................... 1-42
remote RJC ....................................................................... 1-13
remote RJC (RRJC) reference channel ............................ 3-16
RRJC ................................................................................ 1-13
RS-232 communication ..................................................... 1-16
RS-232 interface ..................................................... 2-25, 5-10
RS-422A/485 communication ........................................... 1-16
RS-422A/485 interface ...................................................... 2-22
Index
Index-3
Index
S
Page
saving alarm summaries ................................................... 1-20
saving the data acquisition log file .................................... 1-20
saving thinned data ........................................................... 1-17
scale values ...................................................................... 3-29
self-test operation ............................................................. 1-11
send data control .............................................................. 2-25
sender ............................................................................... 3-33
setting mode ............................................................. 1-14, 3-3
setting the filter coefficient ................................................ 3-17
setting the input range ...................................................... 3-16
setting the match time ....................................................... 3-28
setting the math span ........................................................ 3-18
settings errors ..................................................................... 4-2
signal names ........................................................... 2-22, 2-25
single screen ..................................................................... 3-37
slide zone .......................................................................... 3-39
slot cover ........................................................................... 2-31
SMTP .................................................................................. 5-9
SMTP client function ......................................................... 3-33
SNTP ........................................................................ 2-29, 5-9
SNTP function ................................................................... 1-15
standard accessories ............................................................ vi
standard protocol .............................................................. 2-27
standards compliance ......................................................... 5-1
starting recording .............................................................. 3-31
status ................................................................................ 1-14
status bar .......................................................................... 3-39
status indicators ................................................................ 3-31
status information .............................................................. 3-11
steady output operation .................................................... 1-40
stop bit .............................................................................. 2-27
stopping recording ............................................................ 3-31
strain input ........................................................................ 1-31
style number ...................................... 5-2, 5-25, 5-29, 5-33,
suffix code ............................................................................. iv
supply voltage range used .................................................. 5-1
supported external media ................................................... 5-5
switches and keys ............................................................. 1-10
system configuration ........................................................... 1-1
system error notification .................................................... 3-34
system errors .............................................................. 4-1, 4-7
system information ............................................................ 3-10
system initialization ........................................................... 4-18
system reconstruction ......................................................... 3-9
system setting ..................................................................... 3-2
T
Page
tag display ......................................................................... 3-44
tag settings ........................................................................ 3-41
tag strings ............................................................... 1-15, 5-20
termination resistance ....................................................... 2-24
thermocouple ................................................ 1-23, 1-24, 1-26
thermocouple settings ....................................................... 3-17
thinning operation settings ................................................ 3-15
thinning recording function .................................................. 5-8
thinning settings ................................................................ 3-15
time synchronization client Settings .................................. 3-34
timer .................................................................................. 3-28
timer reset ......................................................................... 3-38
timer settings ..................................................................... 3-28
TLOG computation ............................................................ 3-14
TLOG functions ................................................................. 1-45
transfer time shift .............................................................. 3-32
transmission output ........................................................... 1-36
transmission output control ............................................... 3-26
transmit start ..................................................................... 3-38
transport and storage conditions ......................................... 5-1
trend display ...................................................................... 3-39
trip line setting ................................................................... 3-43
troubleshooting ................................................................... 4-9
U
Page
unbalance adjustment ....................................................... 1-32
unit number ....................................................................... 3-11
unit number display ........................................................... 1-11
upper limit alarm ............................................................... 1-13
user privileges ................................................................... 1-15
user settings ........................................................................ 3-8
user zone .......................................................................... 3-39
V
Page
value ................................................................................. 3-21
viewer software ................................................................... 1-7
voltage .............................................................................. 3-17
W
Page
web server function ........................................................... 1-15
weight ........................................................................ 5-1, 5-24
wiring digital input modules ............................................... 2-14
wiring procedures .............................................................. 2-10
wiring with the analog output module ................................ 2-15
wiring with the digital output module ................................. 2-16
wiring with the PWM output module .................................. 2-15
X
Page
XON-XON ......................................................................... 2-26
Index-4
IM MW100-01E
Advertisement
Key Features
- Data acquisition with diverse input & output modules
- Built-in math functions for data processing
- Ethernet & serial communication for connectivity
- CF card for data storage
- Optional RS-232 and RS-422A/485 interfaces
- Robust design for industrial applications
- User-friendly software for configuration & data analysis
- Flexible system expansion for various applications
